Part 1 Introductory
Division 1 General
1 Name of Rules
These Rules are the Road Rules
2008.
2 Commencement
These Rules commence on 1 July 2008.
3 Objects of these Rules
The objects of these Rules are:(a) to consolidate in a single instrument the road rules that are
applicable in New South Wales, and
(b) to provide for road rules that are based on the Australian Road Rules so as to ensure that
the road rules applicable in this State are substantially uniform with road
rules applicable elsewhere in Australia, and
(c) to provide for other road rules to be observed in this State in
relation to matters that are not otherwise dealt with in the Australian Road
Rules.
Note. This rule is not uniform with the corresponding rule 3 of the
Australian Road
Rules.
Division 2 Some features of these Rules
4 Definitions—the Dictionary etc
(1) The Dictionary at the end of these Rules defines certain words and
expressions, and includes references to certain words and expressions defined
elsewhere in these Rules (signpost
definitions).Example. The signpost definition “road related
area—see rule 13” means that the expression road related
area is defined in rule 13 of these Rules.
Note. The Dictionary only includes a signpost definition for a word or
expression if the word or expression is used in 2 or more rules of these
Rules.
(2) The Dictionary is part of these Rules.
(3) A definition in these Rules applies to each use of the word or
expression in these Rules, unless the contrary intention
appears.
(3–1) If a word or expression used in a provision of these Rules is
defined in the Act, it has the same meaning as in the Act, unless the word or
expression is defined in these Rules for the purposes of the provision or
these Rules generally.Note
1. The
Act is defined in the Dictionary. A number of words or expressions
used in these Rules are also defined in the Dictionary to the
Act.
Note
2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 4 of the Australian
Road Rules.
5 Diagrams
A diagram in these Rules is part of these Rules.Note
1. If a diagram of a traffic control device, traffic-related item or
symbol is in black and white in a rule of these Rules, the diagram may be a
black and white version of the device, item or symbol—see rule 314. If
so, the colour version of the device, item or symbol will be in Schedule 2, 3
or 4.
Note
2. A diagram may be an example—see rule 6
(1).
6 Examples
(1) An example (whether or not in the form of a diagram) in these
Rules is part of these Rules.
(2) If these Rules include an example of the operation of a provision
of these Rules:(a) the example is not exhaustive, and
(b) the example does not limit, but may extend, the meaning of the
provision.
7 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
* * * * *Note. Rule 7 (Headings) of the Australian
Road Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules because
section 35 of the Interpretation Act
1987 makes provision for the status of headings in legislation
of this jurisdiction.
8 Notes
A note in these Rules is explanatory and is not part of these
Rules.
9 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
* * * * *Note
1. Rule 9 (Reader’s Guide) of the Australian Road Rules has not been
reproduced in these Rules because the Reader’s Guide to which that rule
refers has not been included in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in
order to preserve uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road
Rules.
Note
2. For the purposes of comparison, a number of provisions of these
Rules contain bracketed notes in headings drawing attention (“cf
RRR”) to equivalent or comparable (though not necessarily identical)
provisions of the Road
Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) (Road Rules) Regulation
1999 as in force immediately before the commencement of these
Rules.
10 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
* * * * *Note
1. Rule 10 (Offences) of the Australian
Road Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules because it
is unnecessary. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve uniformity
of numbering with the Australian Road
Rules.
Note
2. These Rules indicate whether a contravention of a rule is an
offence by the use of the words “penalty” or “maximum
penalty” as appropriate—see rule 10–1 (4) and sections 17
(Penalty units) and 18 (Interpretation of provisions imposing penalties) of
the Crimes (Sentencing Procedure) Act
1999.
10–1 NSW rule: determination of criminal
responsibility
(cf RRR, cll 33–35)
(1) Application of Commonwealth Criminal Code
Subject to this rule, Chapter 2 of the Criminal Code set out in the Schedule to
the Criminal Code Act 1995 of the
Commonwealth (the Commonwealth
Criminal Code) applies to an offence against these Rules as if the
Chapter were in force as a law of New South Wales.Note. Chapter 2 of the Commonwealth Criminal Code codifies the general
principles of criminal responsibility.
(2) Offences are strict liability offences
An offence against these Rules is a strict liability offence for
the purposes of Chapter 2 of the Commonwealth Criminal Code (as applied by
subrule (1)), except where these Rules expressly provide
otherwise.
(3) General defence of accident or reasonable
effort
Without limiting any defence under Chapter 2 of the Commonwealth
Criminal Code (as applied by subrule (1)), a person is not liable to a penalty
for any offence under these Rules if the person proves to the satisfaction of
the court dealing with the case that the offence:(a) was the result of an accident, or
(b) could not have been avoided by any reasonable efforts on the
person’s part.
(4) Operation of Crimes
(Sentencing Procedure) Act 1999 not affected
Nothing in these Rules affects the application of the Crimes (Sentencing Procedure) Act
1999 in relation to these Rules (particularly, Divisions 4 and
5 of Part 2 of that Act).Note
1. Divisions 4 and 5 of Part 2 of the Crimes (Sentencing Procedure) Act
1999 contain provisions relating to how offence provisions are
to be interpreted. For instance, section 17 of that Act defines the amount of
a penalty unit. Similarly, section 18 of that Act sets out rules for
interpreting provisions in legislation that impose
penalties.
Note
2. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules. However, it is intended that each Australian
jurisdiction that adopts the Australian Road
Rules is to apply the provisions of the Commonwealth Criminal
Code to offences against the uniform rules.
10–2 NSW rule: penalties and disqualifications for
speeding offences
(cf RRR cl 154)
(1) Definitions
In this rule:heavy motor
vehicle means:
(a) a motor vehicle with a GVM over 12 tonnes, or
(b) a motor vehicle and trailer combination with a GCM over 12
tonnes.
large motor
vehicle means:
(a) a coach, or
(b) a motor vehicle with a GVM over 4.5 tonnes, or
(c) a motor vehicle and trailer combination with a GCM over 4.5
tonnes.
speed
limit, in relation to a speeding offence, means the speed limit that
was contravened in committing the offence.
speeding offence
means an offence under Part 3 (Speed limits).
Note. Motor vehicle,
combination and
trailer are
defined in the Dictionary, and coach, GCM and GVM are defined in the
Act.
(2) Penalties and disqualifications for speeding
offence
A driver who commits a speeding offence in any of the
circumstances referred to in subrule (3), (5) or (6) is:(a) liable to the maximum penalty specified in this rule for an
offence committed in those circumstances, and
(b) disqualified from holding a driver licence for the period
specified in this rule for an offence committed in those
circumstances.
Note. Driver
licence is defined in the Act.
(3) Exceeding speed limit by more than 45 kilometres per
hour
A driver who commits a speeding offence by exceeding a speed limit
by more than 45 kilometres per hour is:(a) liable to a maximum penalty of 34 penalty units (in the case of a
heavy motor vehicle or coach) or 23 penalty units (in any other case),
and
(b) disqualified from holding a driver licence by a conviction for the
offence (and without any specific order) for 6 months from holding a driver
licence or, if the court on the conviction thinks fit to order a different
period of disqualification determined in accordance with subrule (4), is
disqualified for the period specified in the order.
Note. Coach is defined in
the Act.
(4) Court-ordered disqualification periods under subrule
(3)
In determining a different period of disqualification under
subrule (3) for a driver who commits a speeding offence, the court may specify
a period that is:(a) more than 6 months, or
(b) less than 6 months, but only if:(i) the person’s driver licence or authority to drive in New
South Wales has been suspended for a period (the suspension
period) under section 205 or 206 of the Road Transport (General) Act 2005
for that offence, and
(ii) the specified disqualification period when added to the suspension
period results in a total period of no less than 6
months.
(5) Exceeding speed limit by more than 30 kilometres per
hour
A driver who commits a speeding offence by exceeding a speed limit
by more than 30 kilometres per hour is:(a) liable to a maximum penalty of 20 penalty units,
and
(b) disqualified from holding a driver licence by a conviction for the
offence (and without any specific order) for 3 months from holding a driver
licence or, if the court on the conviction thinks fit to order a longer period
of disqualification, is disqualified for the period specified in the
order.
(6) Exceeding speed limit on road by 30 kilometres per hour
or less
A driver who commits a speeding offence by exceeding a speed limit
by 30 kilometres per hour or less is liable to a maximum penalty of 20 penalty
units.
(7) Alternative verdicts in prosecutions for speeding by more
than 45 kilometres per hour
If a driver is prosecuted under subrule (3) for a speeding offence
in circumstances where the court:(a) is satisfied that the person exceeded the relevant speed limit,
but
(b) is not satisfied that it was exceeded by more than 45 kilometres
per hour,
the court may instead convict the driver of an offence in accordance with
subrule (5) if satisfied that the speed limit was exceeded by more than 30
kilometres per hour, or in accordance with subrule (6) if satisfied that the
speed limit was exceeded by 30 kilometres per hour or
less.
(8) Alternative verdicts in prosecutions for speeding by more
than 30 kilometres per hour
If a driver is prosecuted under subrule (5) for a speeding offence
in circumstances where the court:(a) is satisfied that the person exceeded the relevant speed limit,
but
(b) is not satisfied that the speed limit was exceeded by more than 30
kilometres per hour,
the court may instead convict the driver of an offence in accordance with
subrule (6).
(9) Disqualification period commences on date of
conviction
A period of disqualification imposed by or under this rule
commences on the date of conviction for the offence to which it
relates.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules. However, the Australian Road
Rules allow another law of this jurisdiction to make provision
for penalties.
Part 2 Application of these Rules
Division 1 Roads and road related areas
11 Rules apply to vehicles and road users on roads and road
related areas
(1) These Rules apply to vehicles and road users on roads and road
related areas.Note. Road is defined in rule
12, road
related area is defined in rule 13, road user is defined
in rule 14, and vehicle is defined in
rule 15.
(2) Each reference in these Rules (except in this Division) to a
road includes a
reference to a road
related area, unless otherwise expressly stated in these
Rules.Examples for
subrule (2). 1 A reference in rule 146 (which deals with driving within a single
marked lane or line of traffic) to the road includes a reference to the road
related area of the road.
2 A reference in rule 200 (1) (which deals with certain heavy or
long vehicles stopping on roads) to a length of road includes a reference to
the road related area of the length of road.
3 A reference in rule 31 (which deals with starting a right turn
from a road, except a multi-lane road) to a road does not include a reference
to a road related area, because of the definition in subrule (5) of that
rule.
12 What is a road
(1) A road
is an area that is open to or used by the public and is developed for, or has
as one of its main uses, the driving or riding of motor
vehicles.Note. Motor
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
(2) However, unless the contrary intention appears, a reference in
these Rules (except in this Division) to a road does not include a
reference to:(a) an area so far as the area is declared, under another law of this
jurisdiction, not to be a road for these Rules, or
(b) any shoulder of the road.
Note. The Minister administering the Road Transport (General) Act 2005,
may, by order under section 15 of that Act, declare that provisions of the
road transport legislation do not apply to a road or road related area or do
apply to a specified area of the State that is open to or used by the public.
The road transport legislation includes these Rules.
(3) The shoulder of the road
includes any part of the road that is not designed to be used by motor
vehicles in travelling along the road, and includes:(a) for a kerbed road—any part of the kerb,
and
(b) for a sealed road—any unsealed part of the road, and any
sealed part of the road outside an edge line on the
road,
but does not include a bicycle path, footpath or shared
path.Note. Bicycle path is
defined in rule 239, edge line and
footpath
are defined in the Dictionary, and shared path is
defined in rule 242.
13 What is a road related area
(1) A road
related area is any of the following:(a) an area that divides a road,
(b) a footpath or nature strip adjacent to a road,
(c) an area that is not a road and that is open to the public and
designated for use by cyclists or animals,
(d) an area that is not a road and that is open to or used by the
public for driving, riding or parking vehicles.
Note. Vehicle is defined in
rule 15.
(2) However, unless the contrary intention appears, a reference in
these Rules (except in this Division) to a road related area
includes a reference to:(a) an area so far as the area is declared, under another law of this
jurisdiction, to be a road related area for these Rules,
or
(b) any shoulder of a road, or
(c) any other area that is a footpath or nature strip as defined in
the Dictionary,
but does not include a reference to an area so far as the area is
declared, under another law of this jurisdiction, not to be a road related
area for these Rules.Note
1. Shoulder is defined
in rule 12.
Note
2. The Minister administering the Road Transport (General) Act 2005,
may, by order under section 15 of that Act, declare that provisions of the
road transport legislation do not apply to a road or road related area or do
apply to a specified area of the State that is open to or used by the public.
The road transport legislation includes these Rules.
Division 2 Road users and vehicles
14 Road users
A road
user is a driver, rider, passenger or pedestrian.Note. Driver
is defined in rule 16, pedestrian is defined in
rule 18, and rider
is defined in rule 17.
15 What is a vehicle
A vehicle
includes:(a) a motor vehicle, trailer and tram, and
(b) a bicycle, and
(c) an animal-drawn vehicle, and an animal that is being ridden or
drawing a vehicle, and
(d) a combination, and
(e) a motorised wheelchair that can travel at over 10 kilometres per
hour (on level ground),
but does not include another kind of wheelchair, a train, or a wheeled
recreational device or wheeled toy.Note. Various terms mentioned in this rule are defined in the
Dictionary.
16 Who is a driver
(1) A driver is the person who is
driving a vehicle (except a motor bike, bicycle, animal or animal-drawn
vehicle).Note
1. Bicycle and motor bike are
defined in the Dictionary, and vehicle is defined in
rule 15.
Note
2. Drive includes be in
control of—see the definition in the Dictionary.
(2) However, a driver does not include a
person pushing a motorised wheelchair.Note. Wheelchair is
defined in the Dictionary.
17 Who is a rider
(1) A rider is the person who is
riding a motor bike, bicycle, animal or animal-drawn vehicle.Note
1. Bicycle and motor bike are
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Ride, for the rider of a
motor bike or animal-drawn vehicle, includes be in control of—see the
definition in the Dictionary.
(2) A rider does not
include:(a) a passenger, or
(b) a person walking beside and pushing a
bicycle.
18 Who is a pedestrian
A pedestrian includes:(a) a person driving a motorised wheelchair that cannot travel at over
10 kilometres per hour (on level ground), and
(b) a person in a non-motorised wheelchair, and
(c) a person pushing a motorised or non-motorised wheelchair,
and
(d) a person in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled
toy.
Note. Wheelchair, wheeled
recreational device and wheeled toy are defined
in the Dictionary.
19 References to driver includes rider etc
Unless otherwise expressly stated in these Rules, each reference
in these Rules (except in this Division) to a driver includes a reference to a
rider, and each reference in these Rules (except in this Division) to driving includes a reference to
riding.
Part 3 Speed limits
20 Obeying the speed limit
A driver must not drive at a speed over the speed limit applying
to the driver for the length of road where the driver is
driving.Penalty and disqualification: a driver who contravenes this rule
is guilty of an offence and is liable to a maximum penalty and a period of
disqualification (if any) determined in accordance with rule
10–2.
Note 1. The rules about speed limits are as follows:• rule 21—speed limit where a speed limit sign
applies
• rule 21–1—NSW rule: school bus stop zone sign
is speed limit sign
• rule 22—speed limit in a speed limited
area
• rule 23—speed limit in a school zone
• rule 24—speed limit in a shared zone
• rule 24–1—NSW rule: speed limits for learner and
provisional licence holders
• rule 24–2—NSW rule: speed limit on Lord Howe
Island
• rule 24–3—NSW rule: speed limit when bus displaying
when lights flash speed limit sign
• rule 24–4—NSW rule: speed limits for small motor bikes
during periods of darkness
• rule 25—speed limit elsewhere.
Note 2. Road includes a
road related area—see rule 11 (2).
Note 3. Length of
road includes a marked lane, a part of a marked lane, or another part of a
length of road—see the definition in the
Dictionary.
Note 4. Part 20, Division 2 deals with the way in which a traffic sign
applies to a length of road. Part 20, Division 3 deals with the way in which
the traffic sign applies to drivers driving on the length of
road.
Note 5. Section 43A of the Act provides that a person bringing proceedings
or issuing a penalty notice in which it is alleged that the driver of a heavy
vehicle committed a speeding offence may rely on the average speed at which
the vehicle travelled between different points on a road as evidence of the
offence.If there is more than one speed limit applicable to the driver
between the different points, section 43A of the Act provides that for the
purposes of such proceedings the speed limit that applied to the driver
between those points is taken to be the average speed limit calculated in
accordance with that section.
21 Speed limit where a speed limit sign applies
(1) The speed limit applying to a driver for a length of road to which
a speed limit sign applies is the number of kilometres per hour
indicated by the number on the sign.Note. Length
of road is defined in the Dictionary.
(2) However, if the number on the speed limit sign is over 100
and the driver is driving a vehicle with a GVM over 4.5 tonnes or a vehicle
and trailer combination with a GCM over 4.5 tonnes, the speed limit applying
to the driver for the length of road is 100 kilometres per
hour.Note
1. Combination and
trailer are
defined in the Dictionary, vehicle is defined in rule
15, and GCM and
GVM are defined in the
Act.
Note
2. This subrule is not uniform with the corresponding subrule in rule
21 of the Australian Road Rules.
Different rules may apply in other Australian
jurisdictions.
(3) A speed limit sign on a road applies to the length of road
beginning at the sign and ending at the nearest of the following:(a) a speed limit sign on the road with a different number on
the sign,
(b) an end speed limit sign or speed derestriction sign
on the road,
(c) if the road ends at a T-intersection or dead end—the end of
the road.
Note
1. T-intersection is
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 322 (1) and (2) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign
on a
road.
Speed limit signs |
Speed limit sign (Standard sign)  | Speed limit sign (Variable illuminated message sign)  |
Other signs |
End speed limit sign  | Speed derestriction sign  |
Note 1 for
diagrams. There are a number of other permitted versions of the speed
limit sign and the end speed limit sign—see the diagrams in
Schedule 3.
Note 2 for
diagrams. A speed limit sign or end speed limit sign may have
a different number on the sign—see rule 316 (4).
21–1 NSW rule: school bus stop zone sign is speed limit
sign
(cf RRR, cl 3 of Sch 1)
(1) For the purposes of rule 21:(a) a school bus stop zone sign is a speed limit sign,
and
(b) an end school bus stop zone sign is an end speed limit
sign in respect of a school bus stop zone
sign.
(2) For the purposes of the application of this Part with respect to a
length of road to which a school bus stop zone sign applies, the speed
limit indicated by the sign applies to a driver only while the warning system
of a bus is activated along that length of road.Note. Length of road is defined
in the Dictionary.
(3) In this rule:warning
system of a bus means the warning system referred to in clause 94 of
the Road Transport (Safety
and Traffic Management) Regulation
1999.
School bus stop zone sign  | End school bus stop zone sign  |
Note for
diagrams. A school bus stop zone sign may have a different number on
the sign—see rule 316 (4).
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules. Different speed limit signs may apply to drivers in
other Australian jurisdictions.
22 Speed limit in a speed limited area
(1) The speed limit applying to a driver for any length of road in a
speed limited area is the number of kilometres per hour indicated by the
number on the area speed limit sign on a road into the area, unless
another speed limit applies to the driver for the length of road under another
rule of this Part.Example of another
speed limit. Although an area speed limit sign on a road into a speed
limited area may indicate a speed limit of 60 kilometres per hour, a
particular length of road in the area may have a school zone sign
indicating a 40 kilometres per hour speed limit for that length of
road.
Note. Length
of road is defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A speed
limited area is the network of roads in an area with:(a) an area speed limit sign on each road into the area,
indicating the same number, and
(b) an end area speed limit sign on each road out of the
area.
(3) In subrule (2) (a) and (b):road does not
include a road related area.
Note. Road
related area is defined in rule 13.
Area speed limit sign  | End area speed limit sign  |
Note 1 for
diagrams. There are a number of other permitted versions of each of these
signs—see the diagrams in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for
diagrams. An area speed limit sign or end area speed limit
sign may have a different number on the sign—see rule 316
(4).
23 Speed limit in a school zone
(1) The speed limit applying to a driver for any length of road in a
school zone is the number of kilometres per hour indicated by the number on
the school zone sign on a road, or the road, into the
zone.Note
1. Length
of road is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. A school zone sign may indicate that it applies only at
certain times, on certain days or in certain circumstances—see rules 317
and 318.
Note
3. This subrule applies to road related areas in the school
zone—see rule 11 (2).
(2) A school
zone is:(a) if there is a school zone sign and an end school zone
sign, or a speed limit sign with a different number on the sign, on
a road and there is no intersection on the length of road between the
signs—that length of road, or
(b) if there is a school zone sign on a road that ends in a
dead end and there is no intersection, nor a sign mentioned in paragraph (a),
on the length of road beginning at the sign and ending at the dead
end—that length of road, or
(c) in any other case—the network of roads in an area
with:(i) a school zone sign on each road into the area, indicating
the same number, and
(ii) an end school zone sign, or a speed limit sign
indicating a different number, on each road out of the
area.
Note. Intersection is
defined in the Dictionary.
(3) In subrule (2) (c) (i) and (ii):road does not
include a road related area.
Note. Road
related area is defined in rule 13.
School zone sign  | End school zone sign  |
Note 1 for
diagrams. There are other permitted versions of the school zone
sign—see the diagrams in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for
diagrams. A school zone sign or end school zone sign may have
a different number on the sign—see rule 316 (4).
Note 3 for
diagrams. School days are any days other than a Saturday or Sunday, a day
that is a public holiday or a day publicly notified as a school holiday for
government schools—see rule 318 (3–1).
24 Speed limit in a shared zone
(1) The speed limit applying to a driver for any length of road in a
shared zone is the number of kilometres per hour indicated by the number on
the shared zone sign on a road, or the road, into the
zone.Note. A driver driving in a shared zone must give way to any pedestrian
in the zone—see rule 83.
(2) A shared
zone is:(a) if there is a shared zone sign and an end shared zone
sign on a road and there is no intersection on the length of road between
the signs—that length of road, or
(b) if there is a shared zone sign on a road that ends in a
dead end and there is no intersection on the length of road beginning at the
sign and ending at the dead end—that length of road,
or
(c) a network of roads in an area with:(i) a shared zone sign on each road into the area, indicating
the same number, and
(ii) an end shared zone sign on each road out of the area,
or
(d) a road related area that is between a shared zone sign that
relates to the area and an end shared zone sign that relates to the
area.Note. Intersection is
defined in the Dictionary.
(3) In subrule (2) (c) (i) and (ii):road does not
include a road related area.
Note. Road
related area is defined in rule 13.
Shared zone sign  | End shared zone sign  |
24–1 NSW rule: speed limits for learner and provisional
licence holders
(cf RRR, cl 38 (4)–(6))
(1) Speed limit applying to learner drivers
The speed limit applying for any length of road to a driver who is
the holder of a learner licence is 80 kilometres per hour, unless another
lesser speed limit applies to the driver for the length of road under another
rule of this Part.Note. Length of road is defined
in the Dictionary, and learner licence is
defined in the Act.
(2) Speed limit applying to P1 provisional drivers
The speed limit applying for any length of road to a driver who is
the holder of a provisional P1 licence is 90 kilometres per hour, unless
another lesser speed limit applies to the driver for the length of road under
another rule of this Part.Note. Provisional P1
licence is defined in the Dictionary.
(3) Speed limit applying to P2 provisional drivers
The speed limit applying for any length of road to a driver who is
the holder of a provisional P2 licence is 100 kilometres per hour, unless
another lesser speed limit applies to the driver for the length of road under
another rule of this Part.Note. Provisional P2
licence is defined in the Dictionary.
(4) Rule applies despite greater speed limits
This rule has effect despite any other rule in this Part that
specifies a speed limit applying to a driver for a length of road that is
greater than the speed limit applying to the driver under this
rule.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
24–2 NSW rule: speed limit on Lord Howe
Island
(cf RRR, cl 39)
(1) The speed limit applying to a driver for any length of road on
Lord Howe Island is 25 kilometres per hour.Note. Length of road is defined
in the Dictionary.
(2) This rule has effect despite any other rule in this Part
specifying the speed limit applying to a driver for a length of
road.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
24–3 NSW rule: speed limit when bus displaying when
lights flash speed limit sign
(cf RRR, cl 40)
(1) This rule applies to a driver if:(a) the vehicle being driven by the driver is approaching from the
rear of a bus (whether stationary or in motion) that displays a when lights
flash speed limit sign, and
(b) the bus is fitted with a warning system, and
(c) the warning system is activated.
Note. Bus is
defined in the Dictionary.
(2) The speed limit applying to a driver to whom this rule applies for
any length of road while overtaking or passing the bus is 40 kilometres per
hour, unless another lesser speed limit applies to the driver for the length
of road under another rule of this Part.Note. Length of road and overtake are defined in
the Dictionary.
(3) This rule does not apply to a driver in relation to a length of
road to which a sign referred to in rule 21–1
applies.
(4) This rule has effect despite any other rule in this Part that
specifies a speed limit applying to a driver for a length of road that is
greater than the speed limit applying to the driver under this
rule.
(5) In this rule:warning
system of a bus means the warning system referred to in clause 94 of
the Road Transport (Safety
and Traffic Management) Regulation
1999.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
When lights flash speed limit sign

Note for
diagram. This sign is displayed on buses.
24–4 NSW rule: speed limits for small motor bikes
during periods of darkness
(cf RRR, cl 54)
(1) The speed limit applying to the rider of a motor bike on any
length of road during a period of darkness is:(a) if the engine capacity of the bike does not exceed 100
millilitres—40 kilometres per hour, or
(b) if the engine capacity of the bike exceeds 100 millilitres but
does not exceed 200 millilitres—50 kilometres per
hour,
unless another lesser speed limit applies to the rider for the length of
road under another rule of this Part.Note. Length of road and motor bike are defined
in the Dictionary.
(2) This rule does not apply to any motor bike that is fitted with a
headlight having an effective range of at least 50
metres.
(3) This rule has effect despite any other rule in this Part that
specifies a speed limit applying to a driver for a length of road that is
greater than the speed limit applying to the driver under this
rule.
(4) In this rule:headlight has the same
meaning as in Division 1 of Part 13.
period of
darkness has the same meaning as in Division 1 of Part
13.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
25 Speed limit elsewhere
(1) If a speed limit sign does not apply to a length of road
and the length of road is not in a speed limited area, school zone or shared
zone, the speed limit applying to a driver for the length of road is the
default speed limit.Note. Length
of road is defined in the Dictionary, school zone is defined
in rule 23, shared
zone is defined in rule 24, and speed limited
area is defined in rule 22.
(2) The default
speed limit applying to a driver for a length of road in a built-up
area is 50 kilometres per hour.Note. Built-up
area is defined in the Dictionary.
(3) The default
speed limit applying to a driver for any other length of road
is:(a) for a driver driving a vehicle with a GVM over 4.5 tonnes or a
vehicle and trailer combination with a GCM over 4.5 tonnes—100
kilometres per hour, or
(b) for any other driver—100 kilometres per hour or as otherwise
provided under another law of this jurisdiction.
Note
1. Combination and
trailer are
defined in the Dictionary, vehicle is defined in rule
15, and GCM and
GVM are defined in the
Act.
Note
2. Subrule (3) (a) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in
rule 25 of the Australian Road
Rules. Different rules may apply in other Australian
jurisdictions.
25–1 NSW rule: drivers to which Part does not
apply
(cf RRR, cl 41)
(1) The provisions of this Part (other than this rule) do not apply to
a driver who is taking part in a race, an attempt to break a vehicle speed
record, a trial of speed or any competitive trial as referred to in section 40
(1) of the Act in accordance with an approval given, and any conditions
imposed by the Commissioner of Police, under section 40 (2) of the
Act.
(2) Nothing in this Part is to be construed so as to justify the
driving of any vehicle on a length of road at a speed that:(a) having regard to all the circumstances of the case, is dangerous
to the public, or
(b) exceeds any maximum speed applicable to the vehicle that is fixed
by or under any Act or statutory rule or that is stated in any notice
applicable to the vehicle and displayed in accordance with any law on the road
or in a position where it is visible from the road.
(3) In subrule (2) (a), the circumstances of the case include the
following:(a) the nature, condition and use of the road,
(b) the amount of traffic that actually is at the relevant time, or
that might reasonably be expected to be, on that road,
(c) the proximity of any intersection or grades or curves in the
road.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
Part 4 Making turns
Division 1 Left turns
26 Application of Division to roundabouts, road related areas
and adjacent land
(1) This Division does not apply to a driver entering or leaving a
roundabout.Note
1. Roundabout is
defined in rule 109.
Note
2. Part 9 deals with entering and leaving a
roundabout.
(2) This Division applies to a driver turning left from a road into a
road related area or adjacent land, or from a road related area into a road,
as if the driver were turning left at an intersection.Note
1. Adjacent land
and intersection are
defined in the Dictionary and road related
area is defined in rule 13. Adjacent land or a road related area can
include a driveway, service station or shopping centre—see the
definitions.
Note
2. Rule 74 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver
entering a road from a road related area or adjacent land, and rule 75 deals
with the give way rules applying to a driver entering a road related area or
adjacent land from a road. Rule 212 deals with a driver entering and leaving a
median strip parking area.
Note
3. For the meaning of left, see rule 351
(1).
(3) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area.
Note. A road
related area includes the shoulder of a road—see rule
13.
27 Starting a left turn from a road (except a multi-lane
road)
(1) A driver turning left at an intersection from a road (except a
multi-lane road) must approach and enter the intersection from as near as
practicable to the far left side of the road.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(1A) Subrule (1) also applies to a rider of a bicycle who approaches
and enters an intersection from a bicycle storage area.Note. Bicycle storage
area is defined in the Dictionary.
(1B) Despite subrule (1), if there is space in a bicycle storage area
for 2 riders of bicycles to be next to each other, the rider on the right may
approach and enter the intersection as near as practicable to the right side
of the other rider, but only if that other rider approaches and enters the
intersection in accordance with this rule.
(2) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area.
Note
1. Intersection and
multi-lane
road are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Road
related area includes any shoulder of a road—see rule
13.
Example. Starting a left turn from a road (except a multi-lane
road)

28 Starting a left turn from a multi-lane road
(1) A driver turning left at an intersection from a multi-lane road
must approach and enter the intersection from within the left lane
unless:(a) the driver is required or permitted to approach and enter the
intersection from within another marked lane under rule 88 (1), 92 or 159,
or
(b) the driver is turning, at B lights or traffic arrows, in
accordance with Division 2 of Part 17, or
(c) subrule (1A) or (2) applies to the
driver.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. B
lights, intersection,
marked
lane, multi-lane
road, public bus and
traffic
arrows are defined in the Dictionary, and left lane is defined
in subrule (3).
Note
2. Rule 88 (1) deals with left turn only signs, rule 92 deals with
traffic lane arrows, and rule 159 deals with traffic signs requiring
particular kinds of vehicles to drive in an indicated marked
lane.
Note
3. Division 2 of Part 17 provides for priority to be given to public
buses at intersections with B lights or a white traffic
arrow.
Example for
subrule (1) (a). Starting a left turn on a multi-lane road with traffic lane arrows as
required or permitted under rule 92

(1A) A driver turning left at an intersection from a multi-lane road
that has a slip lane must approach and enter the intersection:(a) from within the slip lane, or
(b) if there is an obstruction that prevents the driver from entering
the intersection from within the slip lane—from within the left
lane.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Obstruction and
slip lane
are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A driver may approach and enter the intersection from the marked
lane next to the left lane as well as, or instead of, the left lane if:(a) the driver’s vehicle, together with any load or projection,
is 7.5 metres long, or longer, and
(b) the vehicle displays a do not overtake turning vehicle
sign, and
(c) any part of the vehicle is within 50 metres of the nearest point
of the intersection, and
(d) it is not practicable for the driver to turn left from within the
left lane, and
(e) the driver can safely occupy the next marked lane and can safely
turn left at the intersection by occupying the next marked lane, or both
lanes.
Note
1. Driver’s
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Vehicle includes a
combination—see rule 15 (d).
Note
3. Rule 316–2 makes it an offence for a do not overtake
turning vehicle sign to be displayed on the rear of a motor vehicle or a
trailer attached to a motor vehicle unless the vehicle is, or the vehicle and
trailer together are, 7.5 metres or more in length.
Example. Long vehicle turning left from the left lane and next marked
lane

(2A) If there is a bicycle storage area before an intersection that
extends across one or more marked lanes of a multi-lane road, a rider of a
bicycle turning left must approach and enter the intersection from within the
part of the bicycle storage area that is directly in front of the left marked
lane or of a bicycle lane that is on the left side of the road.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bicycle storage
area is defined in the Dictionary.
(3) In this rule:left
lane means:
(a) the marked lane nearest to the far left side of the road,
or
(b) if there is an obstruction (for example, a parked car or
roadworks) in that marked lane—the marked lane nearest to that marked
lane that is not obstructed.
marked
lane, for a driver, does not include a special purpose lane in which
the driver is not permitted to drive.
Note 1. Special
purpose lane is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 95 deals with driving in an emergency stopping lane and Part
11, Division 6 deals with driving in other special purpose
lanes.
Do not overtake turning vehicle
signs |

| 
|
Note 1 for
diagrams. These signs are displayed on certain long
vehicles.
Note 2 for
diagrams. These signs must comply with the size requirements set out in rule
316–1.
29 Making a left turn as indicated by a turn line
(1) If a driver is turning left at an intersection and there is a turn
line indicating how the turn is required to be made, the driver must make the
turn as indicated by the turn line unless:(a) the driver is turning, at B lights or traffic arrows, in
accordance with Division 2 of Part 17, or
(b) subrule (2) applies to the driver.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. B
lights, intersection,
traffic
arrows and turn line are
defined in the Dictionary.
Example. Making a left turn as indicated by a turn line

(2) A driver may turn left at an intersection other than as indicated
by a turn line if:(a) the driver’s vehicle, together with any load or projection,
is 7.5 metres long, or longer, and
(b) the vehicle displays a do not overtake turning vehicle
sign, and
(c) it is not practicable for the driver to turn left as indicated by
the turn line, and
(d) the driver can safely turn left other than as indicated by the
turn line.
Note
1. Driver’s
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Vehicle includes a
combination—see rule 15 (d).
Note
3. Rule 316–2 makes it an offence for a do not overtake
turning vehicle sign to be displayed on the rear of a motor vehicle or a
trailer attached to a motor vehicle unless the vehicle is, or the vehicle and
trailer together are, 7.5 metres or more in length.
Do not overtake turning vehicle
signs |

| 
|
Note 1 for
diagrams. These signs are displayed on certain long
vehicles.
Note 2 for
diagrams. These signs must comply with the size requirements set out in rule
316–1.
Division 2 Right turns
30 Application of Division to certain right turns
(1) This Division does not apply to:(a) a driver turning right at an intersection where there is a hook
turn only sign, or
(b) the rider of a bicycle making a hook turn under Division 3,
or
(c) a driver making a U-turn, or
(d) a driver entering or leaving a
roundabout.
Note
1. Bicycle, intersection and
U-turn are
defined in the Dictionary and roundabout is
defined in rule 109.
Note
2. Division 3 of this Part deals with hook turns, Division 4 deals
with U-turns and Part 9 deals with entering and leaving a
roundabout.
Note
3. For the meaning of right, see rule 351
(2).
(2) This Division applies to a driver turning right from a road into a
road related area or adjacent land, or from a road related area into a road,
as if the driver were turning right at an intersection.Note
1. Adjacent land is
defined in the Dictionary and road related
area is defined in rule 13. Adjacent land or a road related area can
include a driveway, service station or shopping centre—see the
definitions.
Note
2. Rule 74 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver
entering a road from a road related area or adjacent land, and rule 75 deals
with the give way rules applying to a driver entering a road related area or
adjacent land from a road. Rule 212 deals with a driver entering and leaving a
median strip parking area.
(3) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area.
Note. A road related
area includes the shoulder of a road—see rule
13.
31 Starting a right turn from a road (except a multi-lane
road)
(1) A driver turning right at an intersection from a road (except a
multi-lane road) must approach and enter the intersection in accordance with
this rule.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Intersection and
multi-lane
road are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) If the road has a dividing line or median strip, the driver must
approach and enter the intersection from the left of, parallel to, and as near
as practicable to, the dividing line or median strip.Note. Dividing line
and median
strip are defined in the Dictionary.
(3) If the road does not have a dividing line or median strip and is
not a one-way road, the driver must approach and enter the intersection from
the left of, parallel to, and as near as practicable to, the centre of the
road.Note. Centre of the
road and one-way road are
defined in the Dictionary.
(4) If the road is a one-way road, the driver must approach and enter
the intersection from as near as practicable to the far right side of the
road.
(4A) Subrules (2), (3) and (4) also apply to a rider of a bicycle who
approaches and enters an intersection from a bicycle storage
area.Note. Bicycle storage
area is defined in the Dictionary.
(4B) Despite subrules (2), (3) and (4), if there is space in a bicycle
storage area for 2 riders of bicycles to be next to each other, the rider on
the left may approach and enter the intersection as near as practicable to the
left side of the other rider, but only if that other rider approaches and
enters the intersection in accordance with this
rule.
(5) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area.
Note. Road related
area includes any shoulder of a road—see rule
13.
Examples. Example 1
Starting a right turn from a road with a dividing line

Example 2
Starting a right turn from a one-way road

32 Starting a right turn from a multi-lane road
(1) A driver turning right at an intersection from a multi-lane road
must approach and enter the intersection from within the right lane
unless:(a) the driver is required or permitted to approach and enter the
intersection from within another marked lane in accordance with rule 89 (1),
92 or 159, or
(b) the driver is turning, at B lights or traffic arrows, in
accordance with Division 2 of Part 17, or
(c) subrule (2) applies to the driver.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. B
lights, intersection,
marked
lane, multi-lane
road, public bus and
traffic
arrows are defined in the Dictionary, and right lane is
defined in subrule (3).
Note
2. Rule 89 (1) deals with right turn only signs, rule 92 deals
with traffic lane arrows, and rule 159 deals with traffic signs requiring
particular kinds of vehicles to drive in an indicated marked
lane.
Note
3. Division 2 of Part 17 provides for priority to be given to public
buses at intersections with B lights or a white traffic
arrow.
Example for
subrule (1) (a). Starting a right turn on a multi-lane road with traffic lane arrows
as required or permitted under rule 92

(2) A driver may approach and enter the intersection from the marked
lane next to the right lane as well as, or instead of, the right lane
if:(a) the driver’s vehicle, together with any load or projection,
is 7.5 metres long, or longer, and
(b) the vehicle displays a do not overtake turning vehicle
sign, and
(c) any part of the vehicle is within 50 metres of the nearest point
of the intersection, and
(d) it is not practicable for the driver to turn right from within the
right lane, and
(e) the driver can safely occupy the next marked lane and can safely
turn right at the intersection by occupying the next marked lane, or both
lanes.
Note
1. Driver’s
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Vehicle includes a
combination—see rule 15 (d).
Note
3. Rule 316–2 makes it an offence for a do not overtake
turning vehicle sign to be displayed on the rear of a motor vehicle or a
trailer attached to a motor vehicle unless the vehicle is, or the vehicle and
trailer together are, 7.5 metres or more in length.
(2A) If there is a bicycle storage area before an intersection that
extends across one or more marked lanes of a multi-lane road, a rider of a
bicycle turning right (but not making a hook turn) must approach and enter the
intersection from within the part of the bicycle storage area that is directly
in front of the right marked lane or of a bicycle lane that is on the right
side of the road.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bicycle storage
area is defined in the Dictionary.
(3) In this rule:marked
lane, for a driver, does not include a special purpose lane in which
the driver is not permitted to drive.
right
lane means:
(a) the marked lane nearest to the dividing line or median strip on
the road, or
(b) if there is an obstruction (for example, a parked car or
roadworks) in that marked lane—the marked lane nearest to that marked
lane that is not obstructed.
Note
1. Dividing line,
median
strip, obstruction and
special
purpose lane are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 95 deals with driving in an emergency stopping lane and Part
11, Division 6 deals with driving in other special purpose
lanes.
Do not overtake turning vehicle
signs |

| 
|
Note 1 for
diagrams. These signs are displayed on certain long
vehicles.
Note 2 for
diagrams. These signs must comply with the size requirements set out in rule
316–1.
33 Making a right turn
(1) A driver turning right at an intersection must make the turn in
accordance with this rule unless:(a) the driver is turning, at B lights or traffic arrows, in
accordance with Division 2 of Part 17, or
(b) subrule (4) applies to the driver.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. B
lights, intersection and
traffic
arrows are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) If there is a turn line indicating how the turn is required to be
made, the driver must make the turn as indicated by the turn
line.Note. Turn
line is defined in the Dictionary.
(3) If there is no turn line indicating how the turn is required to be
made, the driver must make the turn so the driver:(a) passes as near as practicable to the right of the centre of the
intersection, and
(b) turns into the left of the centre of the road the driver is
entering, unless the driver is entering a one-way
road.
Note. Centre of the
road is defined in the Dictionary.
Examples. Example 1
Making a right turn as indicated by turn lines

Example 2
Making a right turn from a road with no turn lines indicating how to
make the turn

(4) A driver may turn right other than as indicated by a turn line
if:(a) the driver’s vehicle, together with any load or projection,
is 7.5 metres long, or longer, and
(b) the vehicle displays a do not overtake turning vehicle
sign, and
(c) it is not practicable for the driver to turn right as indicated by
the turn line, and
(d) the driver can safely make the turn other than as indicated by the
turn line.
Note
1. Driver’s
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Vehicle includes a
combination—see rule 15 (d).
Note
3. Rule 316–2 makes it an offence for a do not overtake
turning vehicle sign to be displayed on the rear of a motor vehicle or a
trailer attached to a motor vehicle unless the vehicle is, or the vehicle and
trailer together are, 7.5 metres or more in length.
Do not overtake turning vehicle
signs |

| 
|
Note 1 for
diagrams. These signs are displayed on certain long
vehicles.
Note 2 for
diagrams. These signs must comply with the size requirements set out in rule
316–1.
Division 3 Hook turns at intersections
34 Making a hook turn at a hook turn only sign
(1) A driver turning right at an intersection with traffic lights and
a hook turn only sign must turn right by making a hook turn in
accordance with this rule.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Intersection and
traffic
lights are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) To make a hook
turn, the driver must take, in sequence, each of the following
steps:1 Approach and enter the intersection from as near as practicable to
the far left side of the road that the driver is leaving.
2 Move forward, keeping as near as practicable to the left of the
intersection and clear of any marked foot crossing, until the driver is as
near as practicable to the far side of the road that the driver is
entering.
3 Remain at the position reached under step 2 until the traffic
lights on the road that the driver is entering change to
green.
4 Turn right into that road.
Note. Marked foot
crossing is defined in the Dictionary.
(3) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area.
Note. Road related
area is defined in rule 13.
| | Example. |
Hook turn only sign  | Making a hook turn at a hook turn only sign  |
35 Optional hook turn by a bicycle rider
(1) The rider of a bicycle turning right at an intersection without a
hook turn only sign, or a no hook turn by bicycles sign, may
turn right at the intersection by making a right turn under Division 2 or a
hook turn under this rule.Note. Bicycle and intersection are
defined in the Dictionary.
(2) The rider must make a hook turn under this rule in accordance with
subrule (3).Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) To make a hook
turn under this rule, the rider must take, in sequence, each of the
following steps:1 Approach and enter the intersection from as near as practicable to
the far left side of the road that the rider is leaving.
2 Move forward:(a) keeping as near as practicable to the far left side of the
intersection, and
(b) keeping clear of any marked foot crossing, and
(c) keeping clear, as far as practicable, of any driver turning left
from the left of the intersection,
until the rider is as near as practicable to the far side of the road
that the rider is entering.
3 If there are traffic lights at the intersection, remain at the
position reached under step 2 until the traffic lights on the road that the
rider is entering change to green.
4 If there are no traffic lights at the intersection, remain at the
position reached under step 2 until the rider has given way to approaching
drivers on the road that the rider is leaving.
5 Turn right into the road that the rider is
entering.
Note. Approaching and
marked foot
crossing is defined in the Dictionary.
(4) To make a hook
turn under this rule at an intersection that has a bicycle hook turn
storage area on the left side of the intersection as the rider approaches the
intersection, the rider must take the following initial 2 steps instead of the
initial 2 steps listed in subrule (3):1 Approach the intersection from the far left side of the road the
rider is leaving and enter the intersection by moving into the bicycle hook
turn storage area, keeping clear of any marked foot
crossing.
2 Move forward in the bicycle hook turn storage area until the rider
is as near as practicable to the far side of the road that the rider is
entering.
Note. Bicycle hook
turn storage area is defined in the
Dictionary.
Example. 
Example. Bicycle rider making a hook turn at an intersection without traffic
lights

36 Bicycle rider making a hook turn contrary to no hook turn
by bicycles sign
The rider of a bicycle must not make a hook turn at an
intersection that has a no hook turn by bicycles sign.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bicycle and intersection are
defined in the Dictionary.
No hook turn by bicycles sign

Division 4 U-turns
Note. U-turn is
defined in the Dictionary.
37 Beginning a U-turn
A driver must not begin a U-turn unless:(a) the driver has a clear view of any approaching traffic,
and
(b) the driver can safely make the U-turn without unreasonably
obstructing the free movement of traffic.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Approaching traffic
means traffic approaching from any direction—see the definition in the
Dictionary.
Note
2. Traffic is defined in the
Dictionary.
38 Giving way when making a U-turn
A driver making a U-turn must give way to all vehicles and
pedestrians.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. For this rule, give way means the driver
must slow down and, if necessary stop, to avoid a collision—see the
definition in the Dictionary.
39 Making a U-turn contrary to a no U-turn sign
(1) A driver must not make a U-turn at a break in a dividing strip on
a road if there is a no U-turn sign at the break in the dividing
strip.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Dividing strip
is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 322 (5) and (6) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign
at a break in a
dividing strip.
(2) A driver must not make a U-turn on a length of road to which a
no U-turn sign applies.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Length of road is
defined in the Dictionary.
(3) A no U-turn sign on a road (except a no U-turn sign
at an intersection or at a break in a dividing strip) applies to the length of
road beginning at the sign and ending at the nearer of the following:(a) the next intersection on the road,
(b) if the road ends at a T-intersection or dead end—the end of
the road.
Note
1. Intersection and
T-intersection
are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 322 (1) and (2) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign
on a
road.
No U-turn signs |
No U-turn sign (Standard sign)  | No U-turn sign (Variable illuminated message sign)  |
40 Making a U-turn at an intersection with traffic
lights
A driver must not make a U-turn at an intersection with traffic
lights unless there is a U-turn permitted sign at the
intersection.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Intersection and
traffic
lights are defined in the Dictionary.
U-turn permitted sign

41 Making a U-turn at an intersection without traffic
lights
A driver must not make a U-turn at an intersection without traffic
lights if there is a no U-turn sign at the intersection.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Intersection and
traffic
lights are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. U-turns are permitted at intersections without traffic lights
unless there is a no U-turn sign, even though traffic lane arrows
indicate that the driver must or may turn right—see rule
92.
42 Starting a U-turn at an intersection
A driver making a U-turn at an intersection must start the
U-turn:(a) if the road where the driver is turning has a dividing line or
median strip—from the marked lane nearest, or as near as practicable, to
the dividing line or median strip, or
(b) in any other case—from the left of the centre of the
road.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Centre
of the road, dividing line,
intersection,
marked lane and
median strip
are defined in the Dictionary.
Example. Starting a U-turn on a road with a median strip

43
Part 5 Change of direction and stop signals
Division 1 Change of direction signals
44 Division does not apply to entering or leaving a
roundabout
This Division does not apply to a driver entering, in or leaving a
roundabout.Note. Part 9 deals with giving change of direction signals when entering
or leaving a roundabout.
45 What is changing direction
(1) A driver changes
direction if the driver changes direction to the left or the driver
changes direction to the right.
(2) A driver changes direction
to the left by doing any of the following:(a) turning left,
(b) changing marked lanes to the left,
(c) diverging to the left,
(d) entering a marked lane, or a line of traffic, to the
left,
(e) moving to the left from a stationary position,
(f) turning left into a marked lane, or a line of traffic, from a
median strip parking area,
(g) at a T-intersection where the continuing road curves to the
right—leaving the continuing road to proceed straight ahead onto the
terminating road.
Note
1. Marked
lane and median strip
parking area are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. For the meaning of left, see rule 351
(1).
(3) A driver changes direction
to the right by doing any of the following:(a) turning right,
(b) changing marked lanes to the right,
(c) diverging to the right,
(d) entering a marked lane, or a line of traffic, to the
right,
(e) moving to the right from a stationary
position,
(f) turning right into a marked lane, or a line of traffic, from a
median strip parking area,
(g) making a U-turn,
(h) at a T-intersection where the continuing road curves to the
left—leaving the continuing road to proceed straight ahead onto the
terminating road.
Note
1. U-turn is defined in
the Dictionary.
Note
2. For the meaning of right, see rule 351
(2).
Examples for
subrules (2) (g) and (3) (h).
Example 1 Driver indicating change of direction at a T-intersection where the
continuing road curves to the right and the driver is proceeding straight
ahead onto the terminating road  | Example 2 Driver indicating change of direction at a T-intersection where the
continuing road curves to the left and the driver is proceeding straight ahead
onto the terminating road  |
46 Giving a left change of direction signal
(1) Before a driver changes direction to the left, the driver must
give a left change of direction signal in accordance with rule 47 for long
enough to comply with subrule (2) and, if subrule (3) applies to the driver,
that subrule.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Changes
direction to the left is defined in rule 45
(2).
(2) The driver must give the change of direction signal for long
enough to give sufficient warning to other drivers and
pedestrians.
(3) If the driver is about to change direction by moving from a
stationary position at the side of the road or in a median strip parking area,
the driver must give the change of direction signal for at least 5 seconds
before the driver changes direction.Note. Median strip
parking area is defined in the Dictionary.
(4) The driver must stop giving the change of direction signal as soon
as the driver completes the change of direction.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(5) This rule does not apply to a driver if the driver’s vehicle
is not fitted with direction indicator lights.Note. Driver’s
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
47 How to give a left change of direction signal
The driver of a vehicle must give a left change of direction
signal by operating the vehicle’s left direction indicator
lights.
48 Giving a right change of direction signal
(1) Before a driver changes direction to the right, the driver must
give a right change of direction signal in accordance with rule 49 for long
enough to comply with subrule (2) and, if subrule (3) applies to the driver,
that subrule.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Changes
direction to the right is defined in rule 45
(3).
(2) The driver must give the change of direction signal for long
enough to give sufficient warning to other drivers and
pedestrians.
(3) If the driver is about to change direction by moving from a
stationary position at the side of the road or in a median strip parking area,
the driver must give the change of direction signal for at least 5 seconds
before the driver changes direction.Note. Median strip
parking area is defined in the Dictionary.
(3A) Subrule (3) does not apply to the rider of a bicycle that is
stopped in traffic but not parked.
(4) The driver must stop giving the change of direction signal as soon
as the driver completes the change of direction.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(5) This rule does not apply to:(a) the driver of a tram that is not fitted with direction indicator
lights, or
(b) the rider of a bicycle making a hook
turn.
Note
1. Bicycle and tram are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note
2. Rules 34 and 35 deal with bicycles making hook
turns.
49 How to give a right change of direction signal
(1) The driver of a vehicle must give a right change of direction
signal by operating the vehicle’s right direction indicator
lights.
(2) However, if the vehicle’s direction indicator lights are not
in working order or are not clearly visible, or the vehicle is not fitted with
direction indicator lights, the driver must give the change of direction
signal by giving a hand signal in accordance with rule 50, or using a
mechanical signalling device fitted to the vehicle.Note. Mechanical
signalling device is defined in the
Dictionary.
50 How to give a right change of direction signal by giving a
hand signal
To give a hand signal for changing direction to the right, the
driver must extend the right arm and hand horizontally and at right angles
from the right side of the vehicle, with the hand open and the palm facing the
direction of travel.Example. Giving a hand signal for changing direction to the right

51 When use of direction indicator lights
permitted
The driver of a vehicle must not operate a direction indicator
light except:(a) to give a change of direction signal when the driver is required
to give the signal under these Rules, or
(b) as part of the vehicle’s hazard warning
lights.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
Division 2 Stop signals
52 Division does not apply to bicycle riders or certain tram
drivers
This Division does not apply to the rider of a bicycle, or the
driver of a tram that is not fitted with brake lights.Note. Bicycle and tram are defined in the
Dictionary.
53 Giving a stop signal
(1) A driver must give a stop signal in accordance with rule 54 before
stopping or when suddenly slowing.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) If the driver is stopping, the driver must give the stop signal
for long enough to give sufficient warning to other road users.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) If the driver is slowing suddenly, the driver must give the stop
signal while slowing.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
54 How to give a stop signal
(1) The driver of a vehicle must give a stop signal by means of the
vehicle’s brake lights.
(2) However, if the vehicle’s brake lights are not in working
order or are not clearly visible, or the vehicle is not fitted with brake
lights, the driver must give the stop signal by giving a hand signal in
accordance with rule 55, or using a mechanical signalling device fitted to the
vehicle.Note. Mechanical
signalling device is defined in the
Dictionary.
55 How to give a stop signal by giving a hand
signal
(1) To give a hand signal for stopping or suddenly slowing, the driver
must extend the right arm and hand at right angles from the right side of the
vehicle, with the upper arm horizontal and the forearm and hand pointing
upwards, and with the hand open and the palm facing the direction of
travel.
(2) However, the rider of a motor bike may give the hand signal by
extending the left arm and hand at right angles from the left side of the
motor bike, with the upper arm horizontal and the forearm and hand pointing
upwards, and with the hand open and the palm facing the direction of
travel.Note. Motor
bike is defined in the Dictionary.
Example. Giving a hand signal for stopping or suddenly slowing

Part 6 Traffic lights, traffic arrows and twin red
lights
Division 1 Obeying traffic lights and traffic
arrows
Note 1. Traffic
arrows and traffic
lights are defined in the Dictionary. Traffic arrows are a
traffic control device designed to show a traffic arrow, or 2 or more traffic
arrows at different times—see the definition in the
Dictionary.
Note 2. A reference in a rule of this Part to a green, yellow or red
traffic light or traffic arrow is a reference to a steady green, yellow or red
traffic light or traffic arrow, unless otherwise stated in the rule—see
rule 323.
Note 3. The rules dealing with T lights and B lights, which apply to
drivers of trams and public buses, are in Part 17.
56 Stopping for a red traffic light or arrow
(1) A driver approaching or at traffic lights showing a red traffic
light must stop:(a) if there is a stop line at or near the traffic lights—as
near as practicable to, but before reaching, the stop line,
or
(b) if there is a stop here on red signal sign at or near the
traffic lights, but no stop line—as near as practicable to, but before
reaching, the sign, or
(c) if there is no stop line or stop here on red signal sign at
or near the traffic lights—as near as practicable to, but before
reaching, the nearest or only traffic lights,
and must not proceed past the stop line, stop here on red signal
sign or nearest or only traffic lights (as the case may be) until the
traffic lights show a green or flashing yellow traffic light or no traffic
light.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Red traffic
light and stop line are
defined in the Dictionary.
Example for
subrule (1) (b). Stopping at a stop here on red signal sign on a road the driver is
entering

In this example the driver may go straight ahead, or turn right or
left, if there is a green traffic light showing at 1. However, the driver must
not go beyond the stop here on red signal sign at 2 if there is a red
traffic light showing on the road the driver is entering (see 2 and
3).
(1A) However, if the traffic lights are at an intersection with a
left turn on red after stopping sign and the driver is turning left at
the intersection, the driver may turn left after stopping.Note. Rule 62 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver turning
left at an intersection after stopping at a left turn on red after stopping
sign.
(2) A driver approaching or at traffic arrows showing a red traffic
arrow who is turning in the direction indicated by the arrow must stop:(a) if there is a stop line at or near the traffic arrows—as
near as practicable to, but before reaching, the stop line,
or
(b) if there is a stop here on red arrow sign at or near the
traffic arrows, but no stop line—as near as practicable to, but before
reaching, the sign, or
(c) if there is no stop line or stop here on red arrow sign at
or near the traffic arrows—as near as practicable to, but before
reaching, the nearest or only traffic arrows,
and must not proceed past the stop line, stop here on red arrow
sign or nearest or only traffic arrows (as the case may be) until the
traffic arrows show a green or flashing yellow traffic arrow or no traffic
arrow.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Red traffic
arrow is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. This rule only applies to a driver turning left using a slip lane
if the red traffic light or red traffic arrow applies to the slip
lane—see Part 20, Divisions 2 and 3, especially rules 330 and
345.
Note
3. Rule 58 deals with when a driver does not have to stop for a red
traffic light.
Note
4. The driver of a tram or a public bus does not have to stop at
traffic lights showing a red traffic light if a white T light (for trams) or a
white B light (for public buses) is also showing, or a white traffic arrow is
showing and the driver is turning in the direction indicated by the
arrow—see rules 278 and 285.
Stop here on red signal sign  | Stop here on red arrow sign  |
(3) If there is a bicycle storage area before any traffic lights
referred to in subrule (1) or (2), a reference to the stop line in subrule (1)
(a) or (2) (a):(a) in the case of a driver of a motor vehicle, is a reference to the
first stop line that the driver comes, or came, to in approaching the lights,
and
(b) in the case of a rider of a bicycle, is a reference to the stop
line that is nearest to the intersection.
Note. Bicycle storage
area is defined in the Dictionary.
57 Stopping for a yellow traffic light or arrow
(1) A driver approaching or at traffic lights showing a yellow traffic
light must stop:(a) if there is a stop line at or near the traffic lights and the
driver can stop safely before reaching the stop line—as near as
practicable to, but before reaching, the stop line, or
(b) if there is no stop line at or near the traffic lights and the
driver can stop safely before reaching the traffic lights—as near as
practicable to, but before reaching, the nearest or only traffic lights,
or
(c) if the traffic lights are at an intersection and the driver cannot
stop safely in accordance with paragraph (a) or (b), but can stop safely
before entering the intersection—before entering the
intersection,
and must not proceed past the stop line or nearest or only traffic
lights, or into the intersection (as the case may be), until the traffic
lights show a green or flashing yellow traffic light or no traffic
light.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Enter, intersection,
stop line
and yellow
traffic light are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A driver approaching or at traffic arrows showing a yellow traffic
arrow who is turning in the direction indicated by the arrow must stop:(a) if there is a stop line at or near the traffic arrows and the
driver can stop safely before reaching the stop line—as near as
practicable to, but before reaching, the stop line, or
(b) if there is no stop line at or near the traffic arrows and the
driver can stop safely before reaching the traffic arrows—as near as
practicable to, but before reaching, the nearest or only traffic arrows,
or
(c) if the traffic arrows are at an intersection and the driver cannot
stop safely in accordance with paragraph (a) or (b), but can stop safely
before entering the intersection—before entering the
intersection,
and must not proceed past the stop line or nearest or only traffic
arrows, or into the intersection (as the case may be), until the traffic
arrows show a green or flashing yellow traffic arrow or no traffic
arrow.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Enter, intersection,
stop line
and yellow
traffic arrow are defined in the Dictionary.
(3) If the traffic lights or traffic arrows (as the case may be) are
at an intersection and the driver is not able to stop safely under subrule (1)
or (2) (as the case may be) and enters the intersection, the driver must leave
the intersection as soon as the driver can do so safely.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Intersection
does not include a road related area—see the definition in the
Dictionary.
Note
2. This rule applies to a driver turning left using a slip lane only
if the yellow traffic light or yellow traffic arrow (as the case may be)
applies to the slip lane—see Part 20, Divisions 2 and 3, especially
rules 330 and 345.
Note
3. Rule 58 deals with when a driver does not have to stop at a yellow
traffic light.
(4) If there is a bicycle storage area before any traffic lights
referred to in subrule (1) or (2), a reference to the stop line in subrule (1)
(a) or (2) (a):(a) in the case of a driver of a motor vehicle, is a reference to the
first stop line that the driver comes, or came, to in approaching the lights,
and
(b) in the case of a rider of a bicycle, is a reference to the stop
line that is nearest to the intersection.
Note. Bicycle storage
area is defined in the Dictionary.
58 Exceptions to stopping for a red or yellow traffic
light
(1) A driver approaching or at traffic lights showing a red or yellow
traffic light does not have to stop if a green traffic arrow is also showing
and the driver is turning in the direction indicated by the
arrow.Note. Green traffic
arrow, red traffic
light and yellow traffic
light are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A driver turning at an intersection with traffic lights who
approaches or is at a red traffic light on the road that the driver is
entering does not have to stop for that traffic light if there is no stop line
or stop here on red signal sign at or near the traffic
light.Note. Intersection and
stop line
are defined in the Dictionary.
59 Proceeding through a red traffic light
(1) If traffic lights at an intersection or marked foot crossing are
showing a red traffic light, a driver must not enter the intersection or
marked foot crossing.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Enter, intersection,
marked foot
crossing and red traffic
light are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rules 56 and 57 deal with stopping for a red or yellow traffic
light, and proceeding while the light remains red or yellow. Rule 60 deals
with proceeding through a red traffic arrow.
(2) However, if the traffic lights are at an intersection with a
left turn on red after stopping sign and the driver is turning left at
the intersection, the driver may turn left after stopping.Note. Rule 62 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver turning
left at an intersection after stopping at a left turn on red after stopping
sign.
(3) Also, subrule (1) does not apply to a driver if rule 58 (1)
applies to the driver.Note. Rule 58 deals with when a driver does not have to stop for a red
traffic light.
Left turn on red after stopping sign

60 Proceeding through a red traffic arrow
If traffic arrows at an intersection or marked foot crossing are
showing a red traffic arrow, and a driver is turning in the direction
indicated by the arrow, the driver must not enter the intersection or marked
foot crossing.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Enter,
intersection,
marked foot
crossing and red traffic arrow
are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rules 56 and 57 deal with stopping for a red or yellow traffic
arrow.
60A Proceeding through a bicycle storage area before a red
traffic light or arrow
(1) If there is a bicycle storage area before traffic lights that are
showing a red traffic light, a driver of a motor vehicle must not allow any
part of the vehicle to enter the bicycle storage area.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bicycle storage
area, red traffic
light and motor vehicle
are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) If there is a bicycle storage area before traffic arrows that are
showing a red traffic arrow, and a driver of a motor vehicle is turning in the
direction indicated by the arrow, the driver must not allow any part of the
vehicle to enter the bicycle storage area.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Red traffic
arrow is defined in the Dictionary.
61 Proceeding when traffic lights or arrows at an
intersection change to yellow or red
(1) This rule applies to:(a) a driver at an intersection with traffic lights showing a green
traffic light who has stopped after the stop line, stop here on red signal
sign, or nearest or only traffic lights, at the intersection and is not
making a hook turn at the intersection, or
(b) a driver at an intersection with traffic arrows showing a green
traffic arrow who is turning in the direction indicated by the arrow and has
stopped after the stop line, stop here on red arrow sign, or nearest or
only traffic arrows, at the intersection.
Example. A driver may stop after the stop line at an intersection with
traffic lights showing a green traffic light, and not proceed through the
intersection, because traffic is congested.
Note
1. Green traffic
arrow, green traffic
light, intersection and
stop line
are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Hook turns are dealt with in rules 34 and
35.
(2) If the traffic lights or traffic arrows (as the case may be)
change to yellow or red while the driver is stopped and the driver has not
entered the intersection, the driver must not enter the
intersection.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Enter is defined in the
Dictionary.
(3) However, if the traffic lights are at an intersection with a
left turn on red after stopping sign and the driver is turning left at
the intersection, the driver may turn left after stopping.Note. Rule 62 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver turning
left at an intersection after stopping at a left turn on red after stopping
sign.
(4) Also, subrule (2) does not apply to a driver if rule 58 (1)
applies to the driver.Note. Rule 58 deals with when a driver does not have to stop for a red
traffic light.
(5) If the traffic lights or traffic arrows (as the case may be)
change to yellow or red while the driver is stopped and the driver has entered
the intersection, the driver must leave the intersection as soon as the driver
can do so safely.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Intersection
does not include a road related area—see the definition in the
Dictionary.
Division 2 Giving way at traffic lights and traffic
arrows
Note. Traffic
lights are defined in the Dictionary.
62 Giving way when turning at an intersection with traffic
lights
(1) A driver turning at an intersection with traffic lights must give
way to:(a) any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is crossing the
road the driver is entering, and
(b) if the driver is turning left at a left turn on red after
stopping sign at the intersection:(i) any vehicle approaching from the right, turning right at the
intersection into the road the driver is entering or making a U-turn,
and
(ii) any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is on the road the
driver is leaving, and
(c) if the driver is turning right—any oncoming vehicle that is
going straight ahead or turning left at the intersection (except a vehicle
turning left using a slip lane).
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Intersection,
oncoming
vehicle, slip lane, straight ahead
and U-turn are
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. For this rule, give way means the
driver must remain stationary until it is safe to proceed—see the
definition in the Dictionary.
Note
3. Rule 322 (3) and (4) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign
at an intersection.
Note
4. A driver turning left at a left turn on red after stopping
sign, at an intersection with traffic lights showing a red traffic light,
must stop in accordance with rule 56 (1) before making the
turn.
Note
5. In relation to paragraph (a), rule 353 (1) specifies that a driver
is not required to give way to a pedestrian who is crossing the road that the
driver is leaving, and rule 353 (2) provides that a pedestrian who is only
crossing a part of a road is considered to be crossing the
road.
(2) However, a driver who is turning at an intersection with traffic
arrows showing a green traffic arrow need not give way to an oncoming vehicle
if the driver is turning in the direction indicated by the green traffic
arrow.Note. Green traffic
arrow is defined in the Dictionary.
Examples.
Example 1 Giving way to a pedestrian on the road the driver is
entering  | Example 2 Driver turning right giving way to an oncoming vehicle going straight
ahead  |
Example 3 Driver turning right does not have to give way to an oncoming vehicle
that is turning left into the road the driver is entering using a slip
lane  |
In example 1, the vehicle must give way to the
pedestrian.
In examples 2 and 3, vehicle B must give way to vehicle
A.
63 Giving way at an intersection with traffic lights not
operating or only partly operating
(1) This rule applies to a driver at an intersection if traffic lights
at the intersection are not operating, or the traffic lights are showing only
a flashing yellow traffic light.Note. Intersection and
yellow
traffic light are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) If there is a traffic light-stop sign at the intersection,
the driver must comply with rule 67 as if the sign were a stop sign at
an intersection without traffic lights.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Rule 322 (3) and (4) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign
at an intersection.
Note
2. Rule 67 deals with stopping and giving way at a stop sign
or stop line at an intersection without traffic lights.
Note
3. There is no requirement under Division 1 of this Part for a driver
to stop for a flashing yellow traffic light or traffic lights that are not
operating.
(3) If there is no traffic light-stop sign at the intersection,
the driver must give way to vehicles and pedestrians at or near the
intersection in accordance with rule 72 or 73 as if the intersection were an
intersection without traffic lights, or a stop sign, stop line, give
way sign or give way line.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Give
way line and stop line are
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rules 72 and 73 deal with giving way at an intersection (except a
roundabout) without traffic lights, or a stop sign, stop line, give
way sign or give way line applying to the driver.
Traffic light-stop sign

(4) Subrule (3) does not apply if the intersection is a
roundabout.Note
1. Roundabout is
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 114 requires a driver entering a roundabout to give way to
any vehicle in the roundabout and to any tram that is entering or approaching
the roundabout.
64 Giving way at a flashing yellow traffic arrow at an
intersection
A driver turning in the direction indicated by a flashing yellow
traffic arrow at an intersection with traffic lights must give way to:(a) any vehicle travelling on the road the driver is entering,
and
(b) any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is crossing the
road the driver is entering, and
(c) if the driver is turning right—any oncoming vehicle that is
going straight ahead or turning left at the intersection (except a vehicle
turning left using a slip lane).
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Intersection, oncoming vehicle,
slip lane,
straight
ahead and yellow traffic
arrow are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. For this rule, give way means the driver
must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the
definition in the Dictionary.
Note
3. There is no requirement under Division 1 of this Part for a driver
to stop for a flashing yellow traffic arrow.
Note
4. In relation to paragraph (b), rule 353 (1) specifies that a driver
is not required to give way to a pedestrian who is crossing the road that the
driver is leaving, and rule 353 (2) provides that a pedestrian who is only
crossing a part of a road is considered to be crossing the
road.
65 Giving way at a marked foot crossing (except at an
intersection) with a flashing yellow traffic light
(1) This rule applies to a driver approaching or at a marked foot
crossing (except at or near an intersection) with a flashing yellow traffic
light at the crossing.Note. Intersection,
marked foot
crossing and yellow traffic
light are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) The driver must:(a) give way to any pedestrian on the crossing,
and
(b) not obstruct any pedestrian on the crossing,
and
(c) not overtake or pass a vehicle that is travelling in the same
direction as the driver and is stopping, or has stopped, to give way at the
crossing.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Overtake is defined
in the Dictionary.
Note
2. For subrule (2), give way means the
driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see
the definition in the Dictionary.
(3) If there is no pedestrian on the crossing, and no other vehicle
travelling in the same direction as the driver that is stopping, or has
stopped, to give way at the crossing, the driver may proceed through the
crossing.
Division 3 Twin red lights (except at level
crossings)
66 Stopping for twin red lights (except at level
crossings)
(1) A driver approaching or at twin red lights on a road (except at a
level crossing) must stop in accordance with subrules (2) and
(3).Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Level crossing
is defined in rule 120, and twin red
lights is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 322 (1) and (2) deal with the meaning of a traffic control
device on a
road.
Note
3. Twin red lights are generally erected at bridges, ambulance
stations, fire stations or level crossings. The rules about stopping at level
crossings are in Part 10.
(2) If there is a stop line at or near the lights and the driver can
stop safely before reaching the stop line, the driver must stop as near as
practicable to, but before reaching, the stop line.Note. Stop
line is defined in the Dictionary.
(3) If there is no stop line at or near the lights and the driver can
stop safely before reaching the lights, the driver must stop as near as
practicable to, but before reaching, the lights.
(4) If the driver stops for the lights, the driver must not proceed
until the lights are not showing.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
Part 7 Giving way
Note 1. The rules in this Part deal with giving way in most situations. In
addition, other rules requiring a driver to give way include:• making a U-turn—rule 38
• turning at traffic lights at an intersection—rule
62
• at an intersection with traffic lights that are not operating or
only partly operating—rule 63
• turning at a flashing yellow traffic arrow at an
intersection—rule 64
• at a marked foot crossing with a flashing yellow traffic
light—rule 65
• entering and driving in a roundabout—rule
114
• by the rider of a bicycle or animal to a vehicle leaving a
roundabout—rule 119
• at a stop sign at a level crossing—rule
121
• at a give way sign or give way line at a level
crossing—rule 122
• moving from one marked lane to another marked lane, or from one
line of traffic to another line of traffic—rule 148
• when lines of traffic merge into a single line of
traffic—rule 149
• for pedestrians crossing the road near a stopped tram—rules
163, 164 and 164A.
Note 2. For the meaning of left and right, see rule 351 (1) and
(2).
Division 1 Giving way at a stop sign, stop line, give way
sign or give way line applying to the driver
Note. For a driver, a reference in a rule in this Division to a traffic
sign or road marking is a reference to a traffic sign or road marking applying
to the driver—see rules 338 to 341.
67 Stopping and giving way at a stop sign or stop line at an
intersection without traffic lights
(1) A driver at an intersection with a stop sign or stop line,
but without traffic lights, must stop and give way in accordance with this
rule.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Intersection and
stop line
are defined in the Dictionary. This rule applies also to
T-intersections—see the definition of intersection.
Note
2. For this rule, give way means the
driver must remain stationary until it is safe for the driver to
proceed—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Note
3. Part 6 deals with stopping and giving way at an intersection with
traffic lights.
Note
4. This rule only applies to a driver turning left using a slip lane
if the stop sign or stop line applies to the slip lane—see Part
20, Divisions 2 and 3, especially rules 330 and 345.
(2) The driver must stop as near as practicable to, but before
reaching:(a) the stop line, or
(b) if there is no stop line—the
intersection.
(3) The driver must give way to a vehicle in, entering or approaching
the intersection except:(a) an oncoming vehicle turning right at the intersection if a stop
sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applies to the
driver of the oncoming vehicle, or
(b) a vehicle turning left at the intersection using a slip lane,
or
(c) a vehicle making a U-turn.
Note. Enter, give way line,
oncoming
vehicle, slip lane and
U-turn are
defined in the Dictionary.
(4) If the driver is turning left or right or making a U-turn, the
driver must also give way to any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is
crossing the road, or part of the road, the driver is entering.Note. Rule 353 (1) specifies that a driver is not required to give way
to a pedestrian who is crossing the road that the driver is leaving, and rule
353 (2) provides that a pedestrian who is only crossing a part of a road is
considered to be crossing the road.
(5) For this rule, an oncoming vehicle travelling through a
T-intersection on the continuing road is taken not to be
turning.
Stop sign

Examples.
Example 1 Stop line  | Example 2 Stopping and giving way at a stop sign to vehicles on the left and
right  |
In example 2, vehicle B must stop and give way to each vehicle
A.
Example 3 Stopping and giving way at a stop sign to an oncoming vehicle at a
stop sign  | Example 4 Stopping and giving way at a stop sign to an oncoming vehicle that is
not at a stop sign or give way sign  |
In examples 3 and 4, vehicle B must stop and give way to vehicle
A.
68 Stopping and giving way at a stop sign or stop line at
other places
(1) A driver approaching or at a place with a stop sign or stop
line must stop and give way in accordance with this rule, unless the place
is:(a) an intersection, or
(b) a children’s crossing, or
(c) an area of a road that is not a children’s crossing only
because it does not have:(i) children crossing flags, or
(ii) children’s crossing signs and twin yellow lights,
or
(d) a level crossing, or
(e) a place with twin red lights.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Examples. 1 A stop sign at a break in a dividing strip dividing the
part of the road used by the main body of moving vehicles from a service
road.
2 A stop sign on an exit from a carpark where the exit joins
the road.
Note
1. Children’s
crossing is defined in rule 80, intersection,
stop line
and twin red
lights are defined in the Dictionary, and level crossing
is defined in rule 120.
Note
2. For this rule, give way means the
driver must remain stationary until it is safe for the driver to
proceed—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Note
3. For the stopping and giving way rules applying to a driver at an
intersection or level crossing with a stop sign or stop line, see rule
67 (intersections) and rule 121 (level crossings). Rule 80 deals with stopping
at a stop line at a children’s crossing.
(2) The driver must stop as near as practicable to, but before
reaching:(a) the stop line, or
(b) if there is no stop line—the stop
sign.
(3) The driver must give way to any vehicle or pedestrian at or near
the stop line or stop sign.
Examples.
Example 1 Stopping and giving way at a stop sign at a break in a dividing
strip  | Example 2 Stopping and giving way at a stop sign where a carpark exit joins a
road  |
In each example, vehicle B must stop and give way to vehicle
A.
69 Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at an
intersection (except a roundabout)
(1) A driver at an intersection (except a roundabout) with a give
way sign or give way line must give way in accordance with this
rule.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Give
way line and intersection are
defined in the Dictionary, and roundabout is
defined in rule 109. This rule also applies to T-intersections—see the
definition of intersection.
Note
2. For this rule, give way means the
driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see
the definition in the Dictionary.
(2) Unless the driver is turning left using a slip lane, the driver
must give way to a vehicle in, entering or approaching the intersection
except:(a) an oncoming vehicle turning right at the intersection if a stop
sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applies to the
driver of the oncoming vehicle, or
(b) a vehicle turning left at the intersection using a slip lane,
or
(c) a vehicle making a U-turn.
Note. Enter, oncoming
vehicle, slip lane, stop line and
U-turn are
defined in the Dictionary.
(2A) If the driver is turning left using a slip lane, the driver must
give way to:(a) any vehicle on the road the driver is entering, or turning right
at the intersection into the road the driver is entering (except a vehicle
making a U-turn at the intersection), and
(b) any other vehicle or pedestrian on the slip
lane.
(3) If the driver is turning left or right or making a U-turn, the
driver must also give way to any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is
crossing the road, or part of the road, the driver is entering.Note. Rule 353 (1) specifies that a driver is not required to give way
to a pedestrian who is crossing the road that the driver is leaving, and rule
353 (2) provides that a pedestrian who is only crossing a part of a road is
considered to be crossing the road.
(4) For this rule, an oncoming vehicle travelling through a
T-intersection on the continuing road is taken not to be
turning.
Give way sign

Examples.
Example 1 Give way line  | Example 2 Giving way at a give way sign to vehicles on the left and
right  |
In example 2, vehicle B must give way to each vehicle
A.
Example 3 Giving way at a give way sign to an oncoming vehicle at a give way
sign  | Example 4 Giving way at a give way sign to an oncoming vehicle that is not at a
stop sign or give way sign  |
In examples 3 and 4, vehicle B must give way to vehicle
A.
Example 5
Driver turning right at a give way line does not have to give way to
a vehicle turning left using a slip lane

In example 5, vehicle B must give way to vehicle
A.
70 Giving way at a give way sign at a bridge or length of
narrow road
A driver approaching a bridge or length of narrow road with a
give way sign must give way to any oncoming vehicle that is on the
bridge or length of road when the driver reaches the sign.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Oncoming
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. For this rule, give way means the driver
must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the
definition in the Dictionary.
Examples.
Example 1 Giving way at a bridge  | Example 2 Giving way at a length of narrow road  |
In each example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle
A.
71 Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at other
places
(1) A driver approaching or at a place (except an intersection, bridge
or length of narrow road, level crossing, or a place with twin red lights)
with a give way sign or give way line must give way in accordance with
this rule.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Examples. 1 A give way sign at a break in a dividing strip dividing the
part of the road used by the main body of moving vehicles from a service
road.
2 A give way sign on a road at a place where a bicycle path
meets the road.
Note
1. Give
way line, intersection and
twin red
lights are defined in the Dictionary, and level crossing
is defined in rule 120.
Note
2. For this rule, give way means the
driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see
the definition in the Dictionary.
Note
3. For the give way rules applying to a driver at an intersection,
bridge or length of narrow road, or level crossing, with a give way
sign or give way line, see rule 69 (intersections), rule 70 (bridges and
lengths of narrow road) and rule 122 (level crossings).
(2) The driver must give way to any vehicle or pedestrian at or near
the give way sign or give way line.
Examples.
Example 1 Giving way at a give way sign at a break in a dividing
strip  | Example 2 Giving way at a give way sign where a bicycle path meets a
road  |
In example 1, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.
In example 2, the motor vehicle must give way to the
bicycle.
Division 2 Giving way at an intersection without traffic
lights or a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line applying to
the driver
Note. For a driver, a reference in a rule in this Division to a traffic
sign or road marking is a reference to a traffic sign or road marking applying
to the driver—see rules 338 to 341.
72 Giving way at an intersection (except a T-intersection or
roundabout)
(1) A driver at an intersection (except a T-intersection or
roundabout) without traffic lights or a stop sign, stop line, give
way sign or give way line, must give way in accordance with this
rule.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Give
way line, intersection,
stop line,
T-intersection
and traffic
lights are defined in the Dictionary, and roundabout is
defined in rule 109.
Note
2. For this rule, give way means the
driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see
the definition in the Dictionary.
(2) If the driver is going straight ahead, the driver must give way to
any vehicle approaching from the right, unless a stop sign, stop line,
give way sign or give way line applies to the driver of the approaching
vehicle.Examples.
Example 1 Driver going straight ahead giving way to a vehicle on the right that
is going straight ahead  | Example 2 Driver going straight ahead giving way to a vehicle on the right that
is turning right  |
In each example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle
A.
Note. Straight ahead
is defined in the Dictionary.
(3) If the driver is turning left (except if the driver is using a
slip lane), the driver must give way to:(a) any vehicle approaching from the right, unless a stop sign,
stop line, give way sign or give way line applies to the driver of the
approaching vehicle, and
(b) any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is crossing the
road the driver is entering.
Examples.
Example 3 Driver turning left giving way to a vehicle on the right that is
going straight ahead  | Example 4 Driver turning left giving way to a pedestrian on the road the driver
is entering  |
In example 3, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.
In example 4, the vehicle must give way to the
pedestrian.
Note
1. Slip
lane is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. In relation to paragraph (b), rule 353 (1) specifies that a driver
is not required to give way to a pedestrian who is crossing the road that the
driver is leaving, and rule 353 (2) provides that a pedestrian who is only
crossing a part of a road is considered to be crossing the
road.
(4) If the driver is turning left using a slip lane, the driver must
give way to:(a) any vehicle approaching from the right or turning right at the
intersection into the road the driver is entering (except a vehicle making a
U-turn at the intersection), and
(b) any pedestrian on the slip lane.
Example. Example 5
Driver turning left using a slip lane giving way to a vehicle that is
turning right into the road the driver is entering

In this example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle
A.
(5) If the driver is turning right, the driver must give way
to:(a) any vehicle approaching from the right, unless a stop sign,
stop line, give way sign or give way line applies to the driver of the
approaching vehicle, and
(b) any oncoming vehicle that is going straight ahead or turning left
at the intersection, unless:(i) a stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way
line applies to the driver of the oncoming vehicle, or
(ii) the oncoming vehicle is turning left using a slip lane,
and
(c) any pedestrian at or near the intersection who is crossing the
road the driver is entering.
Note
1. Oncoming
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. In relation to paragraph (c), rule 353 (1) specifies that a driver
is not required to give way to a pedestrian who is crossing the road that the
driver is leaving, and rule 353 (2) provides that a pedestrian who is only
crossing a part of a road is considered to be crossing the
road.
Examples.
Example 6 Driver turning right giving way to a vehicle on the right that is
turning right into the road the driver is leaving  | Example 7 Driver turning right giving way to an oncoming vehicle that is going
straight ahead on the road the driver is leaving  |
In examples 6 and 7, vehicle B must give way to vehicle
A.
Example 8 Driver turning right giving way to an oncoming vehicle that is
turning left into the road the driver is entering  | Example 9 Driver turning right giving way to a pedestrian on the road the
driver is entering  |
In example 8, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.
In example 9, the vehicle must give way to the
pedestrian.
73 Giving way at a T-intersection
(1) A driver at a T-intersection without traffic lights or a stop
sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line, must give way in
accordance with this rule.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Give
way line, stop line, T-intersection
and traffic
lights are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. For this rule, give way means the
driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see
the definition in the Dictionary.
Note
3. Rule 75 (1) (d) requires a driver at a T-intersection to give way
when crossing the continuing road to enter a road related area or adjacent
land.
(2) If the driver is turning left (except if the driver is using a
slip lane) or right from the terminating road into the continuing road, the
driver must give way to:(a) any vehicle travelling on the continuing road (except a vehicle
making a U-turn on the continuing road at the T-intersection),
and
(b) any pedestrian who is crossing the continuing road at or near the
intersection.
Note
1. Continuing
road, slip
lane and terminating
road are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. In relation to paragraph (b), rule 353 (1) specifies that a driver
is not required to give way to a pedestrian who is crossing the terminating
road, and rule 353 (2) provides that a pedestrian who is only crossing a part
of a road is considered to be crossing the road.
Examples.
Example 1 Driver turning right from the terminating road giving way to a
vehicle on the continuing road  | Example 2 Driver turning left (except if the driver is using a slip lane) from
the terminating road giving way to a pedestrian on the continuing
road  |
In example 1, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.
In example 2, the vehicle must give way to the
pedestrian.
(3) If the driver is turning left from the terminating road into the
continuing road using a slip lane, the driver must give way to:(a) any vehicle travelling on the continuing road (except a vehicle
making a U-turn on the continuing road at the T-intersection),
and
(b) any pedestrian on the slip lane.
(4) If the driver is turning left (except if the driver is using a
slip lane) from the continuing road into the terminating road, the driver must
give way to any pedestrian who is crossing the terminating road at or near the
intersection.Example. Example 3
Driver turning left (except if the driver is using a slip lane) from
the continuing road giving way to a pedestrian on the terminating
road

In this example, the vehicle must give way to the
pedestrian.
Note. Rule 353 (1) specifies that a driver is not required to give way
to a pedestrian who is crossing the continuing road, and rule 353 (2) provides
that a pedestrian who is only crossing a part of a road is considered to be
crossing the road.
(5) If the driver is turning from the continuing road into the
terminating road using a slip lane, the driver must give way to:(a) any vehicle approaching from the right (except a vehicle making a
U-turn from the terminating road at the T-intersection),
and
(b) any pedestrian on the slip lane.
(6) If the driver is turning right from the continuing road into the
terminating road, the driver must give way to:(a) any oncoming vehicle that is travelling through the intersection
on the continuing road or turning left at the intersection,
and
(b) any pedestrian who is crossing the terminating road at or near the
intersection.
Note
1. Oncoming
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. In relation to paragraph (b), rule 353 (1) specifies that a driver
is not required to give way to a pedestrian who is crossing the continuing
road, and rule 353 (2) provides that a pedestrian who is only crossing a part
of a road is considered to be crossing the road.
(7) In this rule:turning
left from the continuing road into the terminating road, for a
driver, includes, where the continuing road curves to the right at a
T-intersection, leaving the continuing road to proceed straight ahead onto the
terminating road.
turning
right from the continuing road into the terminating road, for a
driver, includes, where the continuing road curves to the left at a
T-intersection, leaving the continuing road to proceed straight ahead onto the
terminating road.
Note. Straight ahead
is defined in the Dictionary.
Examples.
Example 4 Driver turning right from the continuing road giving way to an
oncoming vehicle travelling through the intersection on the continuing
road  | Example 5 Driver leaving the continuing road to proceed straight ahead on the
terminating road giving way to a vehicle travelling through the intersection
on the continuing road  |
Example 5 shows a T-intersection where the continuing road (which
is marked with broken white lines) goes around a corner. Vehicle B is leaving
the continuing road to enter the terminating road. In examples 4 and 5,
vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.
Example 6 Driver turning right from the continuing road giving way to an
oncoming vehicle turning left from the continuing road  | Example 7 Driver turning right from the continuing road giving way to a
pedestrian on the terminating road  |
In example 6, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A.
In example 7, the vehicle must give way to the
pedestrian.
Division 3 Entering or leaving road related areas and
adjacent land
74 Giving way when entering a road from a road related area
or adjacent land
(1) A driver entering a road from a road related area, or adjacent
land, without traffic lights or a stop sign, stop line, give way
sign or give way line must give way to:(a) any vehicle travelling on the road or turning into the road
(except a vehicle turning right into the road from a road related area or
adjacent land), and
(b) any pedestrian on the road, and
(c) any vehicle or pedestrian on any road related area that the driver
crosses to enter the road, and
(d) for a driver entering the road from a road related area:(i) any pedestrian on the road related area, and
(ii) any other vehicle ahead of the driver’s vehicle or
approaching from the left or right.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Adjacent land,
give way
line, stop
line and traffic lights
are defined in the Dictionary, and road related
area is defined in rule 13.
Note
2. Adjacent land or a road related area can include a driveway,
service station or shopping centre—see the definitions of adjacent land
and road
related area. Some shopping centres may include roads—see the
definition of road in rule
12.
Note
3. Part 6 applies to the driver if there are traffic lights. Rule 68
applies to the driver if there is a stop sign or stop line, and rule 71
applies to the driver if there is a give way sign or give way
line.
Note
4. For this rule, give way means the
driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see
the definition in the Dictionary.
(2) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area.
Note. A road related
area includes any shoulder of a road—see rule
13.
Example. Driver entering a road from a road related area giving way to a
pedestrian on the footpath and a vehicle on the road

In this example, vehicle B must give way to the pedestrian on the
footpath and to vehicle A.
75 Giving way when entering a road related area or adjacent
land from a road
(1) A driver entering a road related area or adjacent land from a
place on a road without traffic lights or a stop sign, stop line,
give way sign or give way line must give way to:(a) any pedestrian on the road, and
(b) any vehicle or pedestrian on any road related area that the driver
crosses or enters, and
(c) if the driver is turning right from the road—any oncoming
vehicle on the road that is going straight ahead or turning left,
and
(d) if the road the driver is leaving ends at a T-intersection
opposite the road related area or adjacent land and the driver is crossing the
continuing road—any vehicle on the continuing
road.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Adjacent land,
continuing
road, give way line,
oncoming
vehicle, stop line, straight ahead,
T-intersection
and traffic
lights are defined in the Dictionary, and road related
area is defined in rule 13.
Note
2. Adjacent land or a road related area can include a driveway,
service station or shopping centre—see the definitions of adjacent land
and road
related area. Some shopping centres may include roads—see the
definition of road in rule
12.
Note
3. For this rule, give way means the
driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see
the definition in the Dictionary.
Note
4. Part 6 applies to the driver if there are traffic lights. Rule 68
applies to the driver if there is a stop sign or stop line, and rule 71
applies to the driver if there is a give way sign or give way
line.
(2) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area.
Note. A road related
area includes any shoulder of a road—see rule
13.
Examples.
Example 1 Driver turning right from a road into a road related area giving way
to an oncoming vehicle that is going straight ahead and to a pedestrian on the
footpath  | Example 2 Driver crossing a continuing road at a T-intersection to enter a road
related area giving way to a vehicle on the continuing road  |
In each example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle A. In example
1, vehicle B must also give way to the pedestrian on the
footpath.
Division 4 Keeping clear of and giving way to particular
vehicles
76 Keeping clear of trams travelling in tram lanes
etc
(1) A driver must not move into the path of an approaching tram
travelling in a tram lane, or on tram tracks marked along the left side of the
tracks by a broken or continuous yellow line parallel to the
tracks.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Approaching,
left, tram and tram tracks are
defined in the Dictionary, and tram lane is defined
in rule 155.
(2) If a driver is in the path of an approaching tram travelling in a
tram lane, or on tram tracks marked along the left side of the tracks by a
broken or continuous yellow line parallel to the tracks, the driver must move
out of the path of the tram as soon as the driver can do so
safely.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) In this rule:tram
includes a bus travelling along tram tracks.
Note. Bus
and travelling
along tram tracks are defined in the
Dictionary.
77 Giving way to buses
(1) A driver driving on a length of road in a built-up area, in the
left lane or left line of traffic, or in a bicycle lane on the far left side
of the road, must give way to a bus in front of the driver if:(a) the bus has stopped, or is moving slowly, at the far left side of
the road, on a shoulder of the road, or in a bus-stop bay,
and
(b) the bus displays a give way to buses sign and the right
direction indicator lights of the bus are operating, and
(c) the bus is about to enter or proceed in the lane or line of
traffic in which the driver is driving.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Built-up area,
bus and length of road are
defined in the Dictionary, left lane and
left line of
traffic are defined in subrule (2), and shoulder is defined
in rule 12.
Note
2. For this rule, give way means the
driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see
the definition in the Dictionary.
Note
3. The driver of the bus must give the change of direction signal for
long enough to give sufficient warning to other drivers and
pedestrians—see rule 48 (2) and (3).
Note
4. Under rule 87 (1), a driver entering a marked lane, or a line of
traffic, from the side of the road must give way to any vehicle travelling in
the lane or line of traffic. However, the driver of a public bus does not have
to give way to a vehicle if the vehicle is required to give way to the bus
under this rule and it is safe for the bus to enter the lane, or line of
traffic, in which the other vehicle is travelling—see rule 87
(2).
(2) In this rule:left
lane, of a road, means:
(a) the marked lane nearest to the far left side of the road (the
first
lane) or, if the first lane is a bicycle lane, the marked lane next
to the first lane, or
(b) if there is an obstruction in the first lane (for example, a
parked car or roadworks) and the first lane is not a bicycle lane—the
marked lane next to the first lane.
left
line of traffic, for a road, means the line of traffic nearest to
the far left side of the road.
Note. Marked
lane and obstruction are
defined in the Dictionary, and bicycle lane is
defined in rule 153.
Give way to buses sign

Note 1 for
diagram. This sign is displayed on buses.
Note 2 for
diagram. This sign must comply with the size requirements set out in rule
316–1.
78 Keeping clear of police and emergency vehicles
(1) A driver must not move into the path of an approaching police or
emergency vehicle that is displaying a flashing blue or red light (whether or
not it is also displaying other lights) or sounding an alarm.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Approaching,
emergency
vehicle and police vehicle
are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) If a driver is in the path of an approaching police or emergency
vehicle that is displaying a flashing blue or red light (whether or not it is
also displaying other lights) or sounding an alarm, the driver must move out
of the path of the vehicle as soon as the driver can do so
safely.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) This rule applies to the driver despite any other rule of these
Rules.
79 Giving way to police and emergency vehicles
(1) A driver must give way to a police or emergency vehicle that is
displaying a flashing blue or red light (whether or not it is also displaying
other lights) or sounding an alarm.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Emergency
vehicle and police vehicle
are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. For this rule, give way
means:(a) if the driver is stopped—remain stationary until it is safe
to proceed, or
(b) in any other case—slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid
a collision,
—see the definition in the Dictionary.
(2) This rule applies to the driver despite any other rule of these
Rules that would otherwise require the driver of a police or emergency vehicle
to give way to the driver.
79–1 NSW rule: interfering or interrupting funeral
cortege or authorised procession
(cf RRR, cl 84)
A driver must not interfere with, or interrupt, the free passage
along any length of road of:(a) any funeral cortege or authorised procession,
or
(b) any vehicle or person apparently forming part of the cortege or
procession.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
79–2 NSW rule: precedence at ferries, punts, bridges or
railway crossings
(cf RRR, cl 85)
(1) A driver must on arrival at any ferry, punt, bridge or railway
crossing at which the driver is required to wait:(a) keep the driver’s vehicle as near as practicable to that
boundary of the carriageway of the road that is on the driver's left, and at
the end of the line of vehicles waiting to proceed on board the ferry or punt
or over the bridge or railway crossing, and
(b) not break out of that line to take precedence of any vehicle that
from its position had a prior right to proceed on board the ferry or punt or
over the bridge or railway crossing.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Carriageway and
driver’s
vehicle are defined in the Dictionary, and vehicle is defined
in rule 15.
(2) However, subrule (1) does not apply to a driver at a ferry or punt
if:(a) an authorised person has given permission under this rule for the
driver’s vehicle to break out of the line and take precedence of any
vehicle that had a prior right to proceed on board the ferry or punt,
and
(b) the driver complies with any directions given by the authorised
person as to the order or position in which the driver’s vehicle is to
be placed and in which it may proceed to board the ferry or
punt.
Note. Authorised
person is defined in subrule (4).
(3) An authorised person may give permission for a driver to break out
of line and take precedence of any vehicle that had a prior right to proceed
on board a ferry or punt, in accordance with the directions of the authorised
person, if the authorised person considers that an emergency or all the
circumstances of the case make it necessary or appropriate for the driver to
be given precedence.Note. Precedence might, for example, be given to the driver of an
ambulance proceeding to or from an accident, or to a fire fighter or police
officer proceeding to an emergency or a bus being used to provide a regular
bus service.
(4) In this rule:authorised
person means a police officer or, if no police officer is present,
the person in charge of the ferry or punt concerned.
driver does not include a
rider of a bicycle.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
Division 5 Crossings and shared zones
80 Stopping at a children’s crossing
(1) A driver approaching a children’s crossing must drive at a
speed at which the driver can, if necessary, stop safely before the
crossing.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Children’s
crossing is defined in subrule (6).
(2) A driver approaching or at a children’s crossing must stop
as near as practicable to, but before reaching, the stop line at the crossing
if:(a) a hand-held stop sign is displayed at the crossing,
or
(b) a pedestrian is on or entering the
crossing.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Stop
line is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 322 (3) and (4) deal with the meaning of a traffic control
device at a place.
(3) If a driver stops at a children’s crossing for a
hand-held stop sign, the driver must not proceed until there is no
pedestrian on or entering the crossing and the holder of the sign:(a) no longer displays the sign towards the driver,
or
(b) otherwise indicates that the driver may
proceed.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(4) If a driver stops at a children’s crossing for a pedestrian,
the driver must not proceed until there is no pedestrian on or entering the
crossing.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(5) For this rule, if a children’s crossing extends across a
road with a dividing strip, the part of the children’s crossing on each
side of the dividing strip is taken to be a separate children’s
crossing.Note. Dividing strip
is defined in the Dictionary.
(6) A children’s
crossing is an area of a road:(a) at a place with stop lines marked on the road, and:(i) children crossing flags, or
(ii) children’s crossing signs and twin yellow lights,
and
(b) indicated by:(i) 2 red and white posts erected on each side of the road,
or
(ii) 2 parallel continuous or broken lines on the road surface from one
side of the road completely or partly across the road,
and
(c) extending across the road between the posts or
lines.
Note. Twin yellow
lights is defined in the Dictionary.
Children crossing flag

Hand-held stop
signs |

| 
|
Example. Driver stopped at stop line for pedestrians on a children’s
crossing with children crossing flags

In this example, the driver must stop at the stop line because
there are pedestrians on the children’s crossing.
Note. Example 2 in rule 80 of the Australian
Road Rules has not been reproduced because it is not relevant
to this jurisdiction.
81 Giving way at a pedestrian crossing
(1) A driver approaching a pedestrian crossing must drive at a speed
at which the driver can, if necessary, stop safely before the
crossing.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Pedestrian
crossing is defined in subrule (3).
(2) A driver must give way to any pedestrian on a pedestrian
crossing.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. For this rule, give way means the
driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see
the definition in the Dictionary.
(3) A pedestrian
crossing is an area of a road:(a) at a place with white stripes on the road surface that:(i) run lengthwise along the road, and
(ii) are of approximately the same length, and
(iii) are approximately parallel to each other, and
(iv) are in a row that extends completely, or partly, across the road,
and
(b) with or without either or both of the following:(i) a pedestrian crossing sign,
(ii) alternating flashing twin yellow
lights.
Note
1. Twin yellow
lights is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 322 (3) and (4) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign
at a place.
Pedestrian crossing sign

Examples.
Example 1 Giving way to a pedestrian on a pedestrian crossing  | Example 2 Giving way to a pedestrian on a pedestrian crossing at a slip
lane  |
In each of these examples, the driver must give way to the
pedestrian on the crossing.
82 Overtaking or passing a vehicle at a children’s
crossing or pedestrian crossing
A driver approaching a children’s crossing, or pedestrian
crossing, must not overtake or pass a vehicle that is travelling in the same
direction as the driver and is stopping, or has stopped, to give way to a
pedestrian at the crossing.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Children’s
crossing is defined in rule 80, overtake is defined in the
Dictionary, and pedestrian
crossing is defined in rule 81.
Example. Driver not passing a vehicle that has stopped to give way to a
pedestrian at a pedestrian crossing

In the example, vehicle A has stopped to give way to a pedestrian
on the crossing. Vehicle B must not overtake or pass vehicle
A.
83 Giving way to pedestrians in a shared zone
A driver driving in a shared zone must give way to any pedestrian
in the zone.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Shared
zone is defined in rule 24.
Note
2. For this rule, give way means the driver
must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the
definition in the Dictionary.
Division 6 Other give way rules
84 Giving way when driving through a break in a dividing
strip
(1) If a driver drives through a break in a dividing strip that has no
stop sign, stop line, give way sign or give way line, the driver
must give way to:(a) any tram on the dividing strip, and
(b) any vehicle travelling on the part of the road the driver is
entering (except a vehicle to which a stop sign, stop line, give way
sign, or give way line, applies).
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Dividing strip,
give way
line, stop
line and tram are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 68 applies to the driver if there is a stop sign or
stop line, and rule 71 applies to the driver if there is a give way
sign or give way line.
Note
3. For this rule, give way means the
driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see
the definition in the Dictionary.
(2) In this rule:tram
includes a bus travelling along tram tracks.
Note. Bus
and travelling
along tram tracks are defined in the
Dictionary.
Examples. Example 1
Giving way when driving through a break in a median strip

Example 2 Giving way when driving through a break in a dividing strip to leave
a service road  | Example 3 Giving way when driving through a break in a dividing strip to enter
a service road  |
In each of the examples, vehicle B must give way to vehicle
A.
Note to
examples. A median strip is a particular kind of dividing strip—see
the definition of median
strip in the Dictionary.
85 Giving way on a painted island
A driver entering a turning lane from a painted island must give
way to:(a) any vehicle in the turning lane, or
(b) if the turning lane and painted island are nearest to the far left
side of the road—any vehicle entering the turning lane from the marked
lane, or line of traffic, immediately to the right of the turning lane,
or
(c) if the turning lane and painted island are nearest to the dividing
line or median strip on the road or the far right side of the road—any
vehicle entering the turning lane from the marked lane, or line of traffic,
immediately to the left of the turning lane.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Line of
traffic, marked
lane, painted island and
turning lane
are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rules 138 and 139 (4) allow a driver to drive on a painted island
in certain circumstances.
Note
3. For this rule, give way means the driver
must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the
definition in the Dictionary.
Examples.
Example 1 Driver entering a turning lane from a painted island giving way to a
vehicle entering the turning lane from the marked lane immediately to the
right of the turning lane.  | Example 2 Driver entering a turning lane from a painted island giving way to a
vehicle entering the turning lane from the marked lane immediately to the left
of the turning lane.  |
In the examples, vehicle B must give way to vehicle
A.
86 Giving way in median turning bays
(1) A driver entering a median turning bay must give way to any
oncoming vehicle already in the turning bay.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Oncoming
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. For this rule, give way means the
driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see
the definition in the Dictionary.
(2) In this rule:median
turning bay means a marked lane, or the part of a marked
lane:
(a) to which a median turning lane sign applies,
or
(b) where traffic lane arrows applying to the lane indicate that
vehicles travelling in opposite directions must turn
right.
Note. Marked
lane and traffic lane
arrows are defined in the Dictionary.
Median turning lane sign

Example. Giving way in a median turning bay

In the example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle
A.
87 Giving way when moving from a side of a road or a median
strip parking area
(1) A driver entering a marked lane, or a line of traffic, from the
far left or right side of a road must give way to any vehicle travelling in
the lane or line of traffic.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Line
of traffic and marked lane are
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. For subrule (1), give way
means:(a) if the driver is stopped—remain stationary until it is safe
to proceed, or
(b) in any other case—slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid
a collision,
—see the definition in the Dictionary.
(2) However, the driver of a public bus does not have to give way to a
vehicle if:(a) the driver of the vehicle is required to give way to the bus under
rule 77, and
(b) it is safe for the bus to enter the lane or line of traffic in
which the vehicle is driving.
Note
1. Public
bus is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. The bus must display a give way to buses sign and the right
direction indicator lights of the bus must be operating—see rule
77.
(3) A driver turning from a median strip parking area into a marked
lane, or a line of traffic, must give way to any vehicle travelling in the
lane or line of traffic.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Median strip
parking area is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. For subrule (3), give way means the
driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see
the definition in the Dictionary.
(4) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note. Road related
area is defined in rule 13 and shoulder is defined
in rule 12.
Part 8 Traffic signs and road markings
Note 1. The rules in this Part cover most traffic signs and road markings.
However, some traffic signs and road markings are dealt with in other Parts
dealing with particular subjects. These include:• speed limits (including speed limits in speed limited areas and
shared zones)—see Part 3
• U-turns—see Part 4, Division 4
• traffic lights—see Part 6
• stop signs and give way signs—see Part 7,
Division 1
• roundabouts—see Part 9
• level crossings—see Part 10
• keeping left and lane signs—see Part 11
• stopping and parking—see Part 12
• pedestrians—see Part 14
• bicycle riders—see Part 15.
Note 2. Rule 322 deals with the meaning of traffic control devices
on a road or in or at an area or place (including an
intersection).
Note 3. For a driver, a traffic sign or road marking mentioned in a rule
is, unless the contrary intention appears, a sign or marking that applies to
the driver. To find out how traffic signs and road markings apply to a driver,
see rules 338 to 341.
Division 1 Traffic signs and road markings at intersections
and other places
Note. Intersection, road marking and traffic sign are defined in the
Dictionary.
88 Left turn signs
(1) If there is a left turn only sign at an intersection, a
driver must turn left at the intersection.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. For the meaning of left, see rule 351
(1).
(2) If there is a left lane must turn left sign at an
intersection, a driver who is in the left marked lane when entering the
intersection must turn left at the intersection.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Marked
lane is defined in the Dictionary.
Left turn only sign  | Left lane must turn left sign  |
89 Right turn signs
(1) If there is a right turn only sign at an intersection, a
driver must turn right at the intersection.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. For the meaning of right, see rule 351
(2).
(2) If there is a right lane must turn right sign at an
intersection, a driver who is in the right marked lane when entering the
intersection must turn right at the intersection.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Marked
lane is defined in the Dictionary.
(3) In this rule:turn
right does not include make a U-turn.
Note. U-turn is defined in
the Dictionary.
Right turn only sign  | Right lane must turn right sign  |
90 No turns signs
If there is a no turns sign at an intersection, a driver
must not turn left or right, or make a U-turn, at the
intersection.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. U-turn
is defined in the Dictionary.
No turns sign

91 No left turn and no right turn signs
(1) If there is a no left turn sign at an intersection, or
another place on a road, a driver must not turn left at the intersection or
place.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) If there is a no right turn sign at an intersection, or
another place on a road, a driver must not turn right or make a U-turn at the
intersection or place.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) However, a driver may make a U-turn at the intersection or place
if there is a U-turn permitted sign at the intersection or
place.
No left turn signs |
No left turn sign (Standard sign)  | No left turn sign (Variable illuminated message sign)  |
No right turn signs |
No right turn sign (Standard sign)  | No right turn sign (Variable illuminated message sign)  |
92 Traffic lane arrows
(1) If a driver is driving in a marked lane at an intersection (except
a roundabout) and there are traffic lane arrows applying to the lane, the
driver must:(a) if the arrows indicate a single direction—drive in that
direction, or
(b) if the arrows indicate 2 or more directions—drive in one of
those directions.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Marked
lane and traffic lane
arrows are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Part 9 deals with traffic lane arrows at
roundabouts.
Note
3. Rule 329 explains when a traffic control device applies to a
marked lane.
(2) However, this rule does not apply to a driver if:(a) the arrows indicate a direction to the right (whether or not they
also indicate another direction) at an intersection and the driver is making a
U-turn at the intersection, or
(b) a traffic sign indicates that the driver may drive in a direction
different to that indicated by the traffic lane arrows, or
(c) the driver is driving in the direction indicated by traffic lane
arrows that apply to 1 or more marked lanes and there is an obstruction in
each of those lanes, or
(d) the driver is turning at an intersection in accordance with rule
28 (2) or 32 (2).
Note
1. Obstruction and
U-turn are
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rules 40 and 41 deal with making a U-turn at an intersection. If
there are traffic lights at the intersection, the driver may make a U-turn
only if there is a U-turn permitted sign at the intersection. If there
are no traffic lights at the intersection, the driver may make a U-turn unless
there is a no U-turn sign at the intersection.
Note
3. Rule 28 (2) deals with vehicles 7.5 metres long or longer turning
left at an intersection from within the marked lane next to the left lane as
well as, or instead of, the left lane on a multi-lane road. Rule 32 (2) deals
with vehicles 7.5 metres long or longer turning right at an intersection from
within the marked lane next to the right lane as well as, or instead of, the
right lane on a multi-lane road.
Examples.
Example 1 Traffic lane arrows on the surface of marked lanes  | Example 2 Traffic lane arrows on a traffic sign  |
(3) The existence of a bicycle storage area in a marked lane does not
alter a driver’s obligation to comply with this rule.Note. Bicycle storage
area is defined in the Dictionary.
Division 2 Traffic signs and road markings
generally
93 No overtaking or passing signs
(1) A driver must not:(a) drive past a no overtaking or passing sign if any oncoming
vehicle is on the bridge or length of road to which the sign applies,
or
(b) overtake a vehicle on a bridge or length of road to which a no
overtaking or passing sign applies.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Oncoming
vehicle and overtake are defined
in the Dictionary.
(2) A no overtaking or passing sign on a road applies to the
length of road (including a length of road on a bridge) beginning at the sign
and ending:(a) if information on or with the sign indicates a distance—at
that distance past the sign, or
(b) if the sign applies to a bridge—at the end of the bridge,
or
(c) at an end no overtaking or passing sign on the
road.
Note. With is defined in the
Dictionary.
No overtaking or passing sign  | End no overtaking or passing sign  |
94 No overtaking on bridge signs
A driver on a bridge with a no overtaking on bridge sign
must not overtake a vehicle between the sign and the far end of the
bridge.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Overtake is defined in the
Dictionary.
No overtaking on bridge sign

95 Emergency stopping lane only signs
(1) A driver must not drive in an emergency stopping lane
unless:(a) the driver needs to drive in the emergency stopping lane to avoid
a collision, to stop in the lane, or because the driver’s vehicle is
disabled, or
(b) the driver is driving a police or emergency
vehicle.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Driver’s
vehicle, emergency
vehicle and police vehicle
are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 178 deals with stopping in an emergency stopping
lane.
Note
3. Subrule (1) (b) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in
rule 95 of the Australian Road
Rules. However, the corresponding paragraph in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of
this jurisdiction to permit a driver to drive in an emergency stopping lane.
Different rules may apply in other Australian
jurisdictions.
(2) This rule does not apply to the rider of a bicycle.Note
1. Bicycle is defined in
the Dictionary.
Note
2. If a no bicycles sign applies to the emergency stopping
lane, the rider must not ride in the lane—see rule
252.
(3) In this rule:emergency stopping
lane means a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane, to which an
emergency stopping lane only sign applies.
Note
1. Marked
lane is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 329 explains when a traffic control device applies to a
marked lane.
Emergency stopping lane only sign

Note for
diagram. The sign may have an arrow pointing in a different
direction—see rule 316 (4).
96 Keep clear markings
(1) A driver must not stop on an area of a road marked with a keep
clear marking.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) In this rule:keep
clear marking means the words “keep clear” marked across
all or part of a road, with or without continuous lines marked across all or
part of the road.
Examples.
Example 1 Keep clear marking bounded by line road markings  | Example 2 Keep clear marking with no line road markings  |
97 Road access signs
(1) A driver must not drive on a length of road to which a road
access sign applies if information on or with the sign indicates that the
driver or the driver’s vehicle is not permitted beyond the
sign.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Driver’s
vehicle, length of road and
with are
defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A road access sign on a road applies to the length of road
beginning at the sign (including any road into which the length of road
merges) and ending:(a) if the sign is on a freeway—at an end freeway sign or
end road access sign on the road, or
(b) if the sign is not on a freeway—at the nearer of the
following:(i) if the road ends at a T-intersection or dead end—the end of
the road,
(ii) an end road access sign on the
road.
Example. A road access sign on an access ramp to a freeway applies
to the access ramp and the freeway into which the access ramp
merges.
Note
1. Freeway is defined in rule
177, and road
marking, T-intersection and
traffic sign
are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 229 applies the road access sign to
pedestrians.
Road access sign  | End freeway sign  |
End road access sign  |
Note 1 for
diagrams. There is another permitted version of the end freeway
sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for
diagrams. A road access sign may indicate that it applies to
different or additional vehicles or persons—see rule 316
(4).
98 One-way signs
(1) A driver must not drive on a length of road to which a one-way
sign applies except in the direction indicated by the arrow on the
sign.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Length of road is
defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A one-way sign on a road applies to the length of road
beginning at the sign and ending at the nearer of the following:(a) a two-way sign on the road,
(b) a keep left sign on the road,
(c) another sign or road marking on the road that indicates that the
road is a two-way road,
(d) if the road ends at a T-intersection—the end of the
road.
Note
1. Road
marking, T-intersection
and two-way
road are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. There is a diagram of a keep left sign in rule
99.
(3) This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor bike that is a
postal vehicle, the rider of a bicycle or the rider of an animal if the
rider:(a) is riding on a footpath, nature strip or shared path adjacent to
the length of road, and
(b) is permitted to ride on the footpath, nature strip or shared path
under these Rules or another law of this
jurisdiction.
Note. Bicycle, footpath, motor bike,
nature
strip and postal vehicle
are defined in the Dictionary and shared path is
defined in rule 242.
One-way sign  | Two-way sign  |
Note 1 for
diagrams. There is another permitted version of the two-way sign—see
the diagram in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for
diagrams. A one-way sign may have an arrow pointing in a different
direction—see rule 316 (4).
99 Keep left and keep right signs
(1) A driver driving past a keep left sign must drive to the
left of the sign.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) A driver driving past a keep right sign must drive to the
right of the sign.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor bike that is a
postal vehicle, the rider of a bicycle or the rider of an animal if the
rider:(a) is riding on a footpath, nature strip or shared path,
and
(b) is permitted to ride on the footpath, nature strip or shared path
under these Rules or another law of this
jurisdiction.
Note. Bicycle, footpath, motor bike,
nature
strip and postal vehicle
are defined in the Dictionary and shared path is
defined in rule 242.
Keep left sign  | Keep right sign  |
100 No entry signs
A driver must not drive past a no entry
sign.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
No entry sign

101 Hand-held stop signs
(1) A driver approaching a hand-held stop sign must stop before
reaching the sign.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) The driver must not proceed until the holder of the sign:(a) no longer displays the sign towards the driver,
or
(b) otherwise indicates that the driver may
proceed.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) This rule does not apply to a driver approaching or at a
hand-held stop sign at a children’s crossing.Note. Rule 80 defines children’s
crossing, and deals with hand-held stop signs at
children’s crossings.
Hand-held stop
signs |

| 
|
101A Safety ramp and arrester bed signs
(1) A driver must not drive on a safety ramp or arrester bed
unless:(a) it is necessary for the driver to do so in the interests of
safety, or
(b) the driver is permitted to do so under another law of this
jurisdiction.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) In this rule:arrester
bed means an area to which an arrester bed sign
applies.
safety
ramp means an area to which a safety ramp sign
applies.
Arrester bed sign  | Safety ramp sign  |
Division 3 Signs for trucks, buses and other large
vehicles
102 Clearance and low clearance signs
(1) A driver must not drive past a clearance sign, or a low
clearance sign, if the driver’s vehicle, or any vehicle connected to
it, is higher than the height (in metres) indicated by the
sign.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Driver’s
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
(2) In this rule:vehicle includes any load
carried by the vehicle.
Clearance sign  | Low clearance sign  |
103 Load limit signs
(1) A driver must not drive past a bridge load limit (gross mass)
sign or gross load limit sign if the total of the gross mass (in
tonnes) of the driver’s vehicle, and any vehicle connected to it, is
more than the gross mass indicated by the sign.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Driver’s
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A driver must not drive past a bridge load limit (mass per axle
group) sign if the mass (in tonnes) carried by an axle group of the
driver’s vehicle, or any vehicle connected to it, is more than the mass
indicated by the sign for the axle group.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) In this rule:vehicle includes any load
carried by the vehicle.
Bridge load limit (gross mass) sign  | Gross load limit sign  |
Bridge load limit (mass per axle group) sign  |
104 No trucks signs
(1) A driver (except the driver of a bus) must not drive past a no
trucks sign that has information on or with it indicating a mass if the
GVM of the driver’s vehicle (or, if the driver is driving a combination,
any vehicle in the combination) is more than that mass, unless the driver is
permitted to drive the vehicle on a route passing the sign under another law
of this jurisdiction.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bus, combination,
driver’s
vehicle and with are defined in the
Dictionary, and GVM is defined in the
Act.
(2) A driver (except the driver of a bus) must not drive past a no
trucks sign that has information on or with it indicating a length if the
length of the driver’s vehicle (or, if the driver is driving a
combination, the length of the combination) is longer than that length, unless
the driver is permitted to drive the vehicle on a route passing the sign under
another law of this jurisdiction.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) The driver of a truck must not drive past a no trucks sign
that has no information on or with it indicating a mass or length, unless the
driver is permitted to drive the truck on a route passing the sign under
another law of this jurisdiction.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Truck is defined in
the Dictionary.
(4) This rule does not apply to a driver if the destination of the
driver lies beyond a no trucks sign and:(a) there is no other route by which the driver’s vehicle could
reach that destination, or
(b) any other route by which the driver’s vehicle could reach
that destination would require the vehicle to pass another no trucks
sign.
No trucks sign

105 Trucks must enter signs
If the driver of a truck drives past a trucks must enter
sign, the driver must enter the area indicated by information on or with
the sign.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Truck
and with are defined
in the Dictionary.
Trucks must enter sign

106 No buses signs
(1) The driver of a bus must not drive past a no buses sign
that has information on or with it indicating a mass if the GVM of the bus is
more than that mass.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bus and with are defined in the
Dictionary, and GVM is defined in the
Act.
(2) The driver of a bus must not drive past a no buses sign
that has information on or with it indicating a length if the bus is longer
than that length.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) The driver of a bus must not drive past a no buses sign
that has no information on or with it indicating a mass or
length.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
No buses sign

107 Buses must enter signs
If the driver of a bus drives past a buses must enter sign,
the driver must enter the area indicated by information on or with the
sign.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bus and
with are defined in
the Dictionary.
Buses must enter sign

108 Trucks and buses low gear signs
(1) If the driver of a truck or bus is driving on a length of road to
which a trucks and buses low gear sign applies, the driver must drive
the truck or bus in a gear that is low enough to limit the speed of the truck
or bus without the use of a primary brake.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bus, length of road and
truck are
defined in the Dictionary.
(2) Subrule (1) does not apply to the driver of a bus if information
on or with the sign indicates that it applies only to trucks.Note. With is defined in the
Dictionary.
(3) A trucks and buses low gear sign on a road applies to the
length of road beginning at the sign and ending:(a) if information on or with the sign indicates a distance—at
that distance on the road from the sign, or
(b) in any other case—at an end trucks and buses low gear
sign on the road.
(4) In this rule:primary
brake means the footbrake, or other brake, fitted to a truck or bus
that is normally used to slow or stop the vehicle.
Trucks and buses low gear sign  | End trucks and buses low gear sign  |
Part 9 Roundabouts
109 What is a roundabout
A roundabout
is an intersection:(a) with either:(i) one or more marked lanes, all of which are for the use of vehicles
travelling in the same direction around a central traffic island,
or
(ii) room for 1 or more lines of traffic travelling in the same
direction around a central traffic island, and
(b) with or without a roundabout sign at each
entrance.
Note 1. Intersection, marked lane, traffic and traffic island are defined
in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 322 (3) and (4) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign
at a
place.
Roundabout sign

110 Meaning of halfway around a roundabout
A driver leaves a roundabout halfway around the roundabout
if the driver leaves the roundabout on a road that is straight ahead, or
substantially straight ahead, from the road on which the driver enters the
roundabout.
111 Entering a roundabout from a multi-lane road or a road
with 2 or more lines of traffic travelling in the same direction
(1) A driver entering a roundabout from a multi-lane road, or a road
with room for 2 or more lines of traffic (other than motor bikes, bicycles,
motorised wheelchairs or animals) travelling in the same direction as the
driver, must enter the roundabout in accordance with this rule.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Multi-lane road is
defined in the Dictionary.
(2) If the driver is to leave the roundabout less than halfway around
it, the driver must enter the roundabout from the left marked lane or, if the
road is not a multi-lane road, as near as practicable to the left side of the
road.Note. Marked
lane is defined in the Dictionary.
Example. Example 1
Leaving a roundabout less than halfway around it

(3) If the driver is to leave the roundabout more than halfway around
it, the driver must enter the roundabout from the right marked lane or, if the
road is not a multi-lane road, from the left of, parallel to, and as near as
practicable to, the dividing line or median strip.Example. Example 2
Leaving a roundabout more than halfway around it

(4) If the driver is to leave the roundabout halfway around it, the
driver may enter the roundabout from any marked lane or, if the road is not a
multi-lane road, anywhere on the part of the road on which vehicles travelling
in the same direction as the driver may travel.Example. Example 3
Leaving a roundabout halfway around it

(5) Despite subrules (2) to (4), if the driver is entering the
roundabout from a marked lane and there are traffic lane arrows applying to
the lane, the driver must:(a) if the arrows indicate a single direction—drive in that
direction after entering the roundabout, or
(b) if the arrows indicate 2 or more directions—drive in one of
those directions after entering the roundabout.
Note. Traffic lane
arrows is defined in the Dictionary.
Examples. Example 4
Roundabout with 3 entry points

Example 5
Roundabout with 5 entry points

Note 1 for
examples 4 and 5. Rule 116 requires a driver to obey traffic lane arrows when
driving in or leaving a roundabout.
Note 2 for
examples 4 and 5. The rules in Part 11 about driving in marked lanes, and moving
from one marked lane or line of traffic, apply to a driver driving in a
roundabout—see rules 146 to 148.
(6) Subrule (3) does not apply to the rider of a bicycle or
animal.Note. Bicycle is defined in the
Dictionary.
(7) Subrule (5) does not apply to the rider of a bicycle or animal if
the rider is to leave the roundabout more than halfway around
it.
(8) Despite subrule (2), a driver may approach and enter the
roundabout from the marked lane next to the left lane as well as, or instead
of, the left lane if:(a) the driver’s vehicle, together with any load or projection,
is 7.5 metres long, or longer, and
(b) the vehicle displays a do not overtake turning vehicle
sign, and
(c) any part of the vehicle is within 50 metres of the nearest point
of the roundabout, and
(d) it is not practicable for the driver to leave the roundabout less
than halfway around it from within the left lane, and
(e) the driver can safely occupy the next marked lane and can safely
leave the roundabout less than halfway around it by occupying the next marked
lane, or both lanes.
(9) Despite subrule (3), a driver may approach and enter the
roundabout from the marked lane next to the right lane as well as, or instead
of, the right lane if:(a) the driver’s vehicle, together with any load or projection,
is 7.5 metres long, or longer, and
(b) the vehicle displays a do not overtake turning vehicle
sign, and
(c) any part of the vehicle is within 50 metres of the nearest point
of the roundabout, and
(d) it is not practicable for the driver to leave the roundabout more
than halfway around it from within the right lane, and
(e) the driver can safely occupy the next marked lane and can safely
leave the roundabout more than halfway around it by occupying the next marked
lane, or both lanes.
(10) In this rule:left
lane means:
(a) the marked lane nearest to the far left side of the road,
or
(b) if there is an obstruction (for example, a parked car or
roadworks) in that marked lane—the marked lane nearest to that marked
lane that is not obstructed.
marked
lane, for a driver, does not include a special purpose lane in which
the driver is not permitted to drive.
right
lane means:
(a) the marked lane nearest to the dividing line or median strip on
the road, or
(b) if there is an obstruction (for example, a parked car or
roadworks) in that marked lane—the marked lane nearest to that marked
lane that is not obstructed.
112 Giving a left change of direction signal when entering a
roundabout
(1) This rule applies to a driver entering a roundabout if:(a) the driver is to leave the roundabout at the first exit after
entering the roundabout, and
(b) the exit is less than halfway around the
roundabout.
(2) Before entering the roundabout, the driver must give a left change
of direction signal for long enough to give sufficient warning to other
drivers and pedestrians.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Left change of
direction signal is defined in the Dictionary.
(3) The driver must continue to give the change of direction signal
until the driver has left the roundabout.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(4) This rule does not apply to a driver if the driver’s vehicle
is not fitted with direction indicator lights.Note. Driver’s
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
113 Giving a right change of direction signal when entering a
roundabout
(1) This rule applies to a driver entering a roundabout if the driver
is to leave the roundabout more than halfway around
it.
(2) Before entering the roundabout, the driver must give a right
change of direction signal for long enough to give sufficient warning to other
drivers and pedestrians.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Right change of
direction signal is defined in the Dictionary.
(3) The driver must continue to give the change of direction signal
while the driver is driving in the roundabout, unless:(a) the driver is changing marked lanes, or entering another line of
traffic, or
(b) the driver’s vehicle is not fitted with direction indicator
lights, or
(c) the driver is about to leave the
roundabout.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Driver’s
vehicle and marked lane are defined
in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 117 deals with giving change of direction signals before
changing marked lanes, or entering another line of traffic, in a
roundabout.
Note
3. Rule 118 requires a driver, if practicable, to give a left change
of direction signal when leaving a roundabout.
114 Giving way when entering or driving in a
roundabout
(1) A driver entering a roundabout must give way to:(a) any vehicle in the roundabout, and
(b) a tram that is entering or approaching the
roundabout.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Tram is
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. For this rule, give way means the driver
must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the
definition in the Dictionary.
(2) A driver driving in a roundabout must give way to a tram that is
in, entering or approaching the roundabout.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) In this rule:tram includes
a bus travelling along tram tracks.
Note
1. Bus and
travelling along
tram tracks are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. For the give way rules applying to a driver moving from one marked
lane or line of traffic to another marked lane or line of traffic, see rule
148.
115 Driving in a roundabout to the left of the central
traffic island
(1) A driver driving in a roundabout must drive:(a) to the left of the central traffic island in the roundabout,
or
(b) if subrule (2) applies to the driver—on the edge of the
central traffic island, to the left of the centre of the island,
or
(c) if subrule (3) applies to the driver—over the central
traffic island, to the left of the centre of the
island.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Traffic
island is defined in the Dictionary.
(2) This subrule applies to a driver if:(a) the driver’s vehicle is too large to drive in the roundabout
without driving on the edge of the central traffic island,
and
(b) the driver can safely drive on the edge of the central traffic
island.
Note. Driver’s
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
(3) This subrule applies to a driver if:(a) the driver’s vehicle is too large to drive in the roundabout
without driving over the central traffic island, and
(b) the central traffic island is designed to allow a vehicle of that
kind to be driven over it.
116 Obeying traffic lane arrows when driving in or leaving a
roundabout
If a driver is driving in a marked lane in a roundabout and there
are traffic lane arrows applying to the lane, the driver must:(a) if the arrows indicate a single direction—drive in or leave
the roundabout in that direction, or
(b) if the arrows indicate 2 or more directions—drive in or
leave the roundabout in one of those directions.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Marked
lane and traffic lane arrows
are defined in the Dictionary.
117 Giving a change of direction signal when changing marked
lanes or lines of traffic in a roundabout
(1) A driver driving in a roundabout must give a left change of
direction signal before the driver changes marked lanes to the left, or enters
a part of the roundabout where there is room for another line of traffic to
the left, in the roundabout, unless the driver’s vehicle is not fitted
with direction indicator lights.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Driver’s
vehicle and left change of
direction signal are defined in the
Dictionary.
(2) A driver driving in a roundabout must give a right change of
direction signal before the driver changes marked lanes to the right, or
enters a part of the roundabout where there is room for another line of
traffic to the right, in the roundabout.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Right change of
direction signal is defined in the Dictionary.
118 Giving a left change of direction signal when leaving a
roundabout
(1) If practicable, a driver driving in a roundabout must give a left
change of direction signal when leaving the roundabout.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Left change of
direction signal is defined in the Dictionary.
(2) The driver must stop giving the change of direction signal as soon
as the driver has left the roundabout.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) This rule does not apply to a driver if the driver’s vehicle
is not fitted with direction indicator lights.Note
1. Driver’s
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. The rules in Part 11 about driving in marked lanes and moving from
one marked lane or line of traffic to another marked lane or line of traffic
apply to a driver leaving a roundabout—see rules 146 to
148.
119 Giving way by the rider of a bicycle or animal to a
vehicle leaving a roundabout
The rider of a bicycle or animal who is riding in the far left
marked lane of a roundabout with 2 or more marked lanes, or the far left line
of traffic in a roundabout with room for 2 or more lines of traffic (other
than motor bikes, bicycles, motorised wheelchairs or animals), must give way
to any vehicle leaving the roundabout.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note 1. Bicycle and
marked lane are
defined in the Dictionary, and vehicle is defined in rule
15.
Note 2. For this rule, give
way means the rider must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid
a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Part 10 Level crossings
120 What is a level crossing
(1) A level
crossing is:(a) an area where a road and a railway meet at substantially the same
level, whether or not there is a level crossing sign on the road at all
or any of the entrances to the area, or
(b) an area where a road and tram tracks meet at substantially the
same level and that has a level crossing sign on the road at each
entrance to the area.
Note. Tram
tracks is defined in the Dictionary.
(2) In this rule:road does
not include a road related area.
Note. Road
related area is defined in rule 13.
Level crossing
signs |

| 
|
121 Stopping and giving way at a stop sign at a level
crossing
A driver at a level crossing with a stop sign must:(a) stop as near as practicable to, but before reaching, the stop line
or, if there is no stop line, as near as practicable to, but before reaching,
the stop sign, and
(b) give way to any train or tram on, approaching or entering the
crossing.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note 1. Approaching, enter, stop line and tram are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note 2. For this rule, give
way means the driver must remain stationary until it is safe for the
driver to proceed—see the definition in the
Dictionary.
Stop sign

122 Giving way at a give way sign or give way line at a level
crossing
A driver at a level crossing with a give way sign or give
way line must give way to any train or tram on, approaching or entering the
crossing.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note 1. Approaching, enter, give way line and tram are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note 2. For this rule, give
way means the driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid
a collision—see the definition in the Dictionary.
Give way sign

123 Entering a level crossing when a train or tram is
approaching etc
A driver must not enter a level crossing if:(a) warning lights (for example, twin red lights or rotating red
lights) are operating or warning bells are ringing, or
(b) a gate, boom or barrier at the crossing is closed or is opening or
closing, or
(c) a train or tram is on or entering the crossing,
or
(d) a train or tram approaching the crossing can be seen from the
crossing, or is sounding a warning, and there would be a danger of a collision
with the train or tram if the driver entered the crossing,
or
(e) the driver cannot drive through the crossing because the crossing,
or a road beyond the crossing, is blocked.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Examples for paragraph
(e). The crossing, or a road beyond the crossing, may be blocked by
congested traffic, a disabled vehicle, a collision between vehicles or between
a vehicle and a pedestrian, or by stock on the road.
Note. Approaching, enter, tram and twin red lights are
defined in the Dictionary.
124 Leaving a level crossing
A driver who enters a level crossing must leave the level crossing
as soon as the driver can do so safely.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Enter is
defined in the Dictionary.
Part 11 Keeping left, overtaking and other driving
rules
Division 1 General
125 Unreasonably obstructing drivers or
pedestrians
(1) A driver must not unreasonably obstruct the path of another driver
or a pedestrian.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Driver includes a
person in control of a vehicle—see the definition of drive in the
Dictionary.
(2) For this rule, a driver does not unreasonably obstruct the path of
another driver or a pedestrian only because:(a) the driver is stopped in traffic, or
(b) the driver is driving more slowly than other vehicles (unless the
driver is driving abnormally slowly in the
circumstances).
Example of
a driver driving abnormally slowly. A driver driving at a speed of 20 kilometres per hour on a length
of road to which a speed limit of 80 kilometres per hour applies when there is
no reason for the driver to drive at that speed on the length of
road.
126 Keeping a safe distance behind vehicles
A driver must drive a sufficient distance behind a vehicle
travelling in front of the driver so the driver can, if necessary, stop safely
to avoid a collision with the vehicle.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
127 Keeping a minimum distance between long
vehicles
(1) The driver of a long vehicle must drive at least the required
minimum distance behind another long vehicle travelling in front of the
driver, unless the driver is:(a) driving on a multi-lane road or any length of road in a built-up
area, or
(b) overtaking.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Built-up area,
length of
road, multi-lane
road and overtake are
defined in the Dictionary.
(2) In this rule:long
vehicle means a vehicle that, together with any load or projection,
is 7.5 metres long, or longer.
Note. Vehicle
includes a combination—see rule 15 (d).
required minimum
distance means:
(a) for a road train that is behind a long vehicle—200 metres
or, if another law of this jurisdiction specifies a different distance, that
distance, or
(b) for a long vehicle other than a road train that is behind a long
vehicle—60 metres or, if another law of this jurisdiction specifies a
different distance, that distance.
road
train has the same meaning as in the Road Transport (Mass, Loading and Access)
Regulation 2005.
Note. This definition is not uniform with the corresponding definition
in rule 127 (2) of the Australian Road
Rules. However, the definition in the Australian Road Rules allows the term to be
defined by reference to another law of this jurisdiction. Different rules may
apply in other Australian jurisdictions. Different definitions may apply in
other Australian jurisdictions.
128 Entering blocked intersections
A driver must not enter an intersection if the driver cannot drive
through the intersection because the intersection, or a road beyond the
intersection, is blocked.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Examples. The intersection, or a road beyond the intersection, may be
blocked by congested traffic, a disabled vehicle, a collision between vehicles
or between a vehicle and a pedestrian, or by a fallen load on the
road.
Note. Enter
and intersection are
defined in the Dictionary.
128A Entering blocked crossings
(1) A driver must not enter a children’s crossing, marked foot
crossing or pedestrian crossing if the driver cannot drive through the
crossing because the crossing, or a road beyond the crossing, is
blocked.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Examples. The crossing, or a road beyond the crossing, may be blocked by
congested traffic, a disabled vehicle, a collision between vehicles or between
a vehicle and a pedestrian, or by a fallen load on the
road.
Note. Children’s
crossing, enter, marked foot
crossing and pedestrian
crossing are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) Despite subrule (1), a driver may enter a children’s
crossing or a pedestrian crossing if:(a) the crossing is immediately before an intersection that does not
have traffic lights, and
(b) the crossing is not blocked, and
(c) before entering the crossing, the driver gives way to any
pedestrian on the crossing.
Division 2 Keeping to the left
129 Keeping to the far left side of a road
(1) A driver on a road (except a multi-lane road) must drive as near
as practicable to the far left side of the road.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Multi-lane
road is defined in the Dictionary.
(2) This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor
bike.Note. Motor
bike is defined in the Dictionary.
(3) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area.
Note. Road related
area includes the shoulder of a road—see rule
13.
130 Keeping to the left on a multi-lane road
(1) This rule applies to a driver driving on a multi-lane road
if:(a) the speed limit applying to the driver for the length of road
where the driver is driving is over 80 kilometres per hour,
or
(b) a keep left unless overtaking sign applies to the length of
road where the driver is driving.
Note
1. Length of road and
multi-lane
road are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Part 3 deals with speed limits.
(2) The driver must not drive in the right lane unless:(a) the driver is turning right, or making a U-turn from the centre of
the road, and is giving a right change of direction signal,
or
(b) the driver is overtaking, or
(c) a left lane must turn left sign or left traffic lane arrows
apply to any other lane and the driver is not turning left,
or
(d) the driver is required to drive in the right lane under rule 159,
or
(e) the driver is avoiding an obstruction, or
(f) the traffic in each other lane is congested,
or
(g) the traffic in every lane is congested, or
(h) the right lane is a special purpose lane in which the driver,
under another provision of these Rules, is permitted to drive,
or
(i) there are only 2 marked lanes and the left lane is a slow vehicle
turn out lane.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Centre of the
road, left traffic
lane arrows, obstruction,
overtake,
right
change of direction signal, special purpose
lane, traffic, and
U-turn are
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 159 deals with traffic signs that require a particular kind
of vehicle to drive in the marked lane indicated by the
signs.
Note
3. Rule 329 deals with when a traffic control device applies to a
marked lane.
(3) A keep left unless overtaking sign on a multi-lane road
applies to the length of road beginning at the sign and ending at the nearest
of the following:(a) an end keep left unless overtaking sign on the
road,
(b) a traffic sign or road marking on the road that indicates that the
road is no longer a multi-lane road,
(c) if the road ends at a T-intersection or dead end—the end of
the road.
Note. Road
marking, T-intersection
and traffic
sign are defined in the Dictionary.
(4) In this rule:lane,
for a driver, means a marked lane for vehicles travelling in the same
direction as the driver, but does not include a special purpose lane in which
the driver is not permitted to drive.
Note 1. Marked
lane and special
purpose lane are defined in the Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 95 deals with driving in emergency stopping lanes, and
Division 6 of this Part deals with driving in other special purpose
lanes.
slow vehicle turn
out lane means a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane, to which
a slow vehicle turn out lane sign applies.
Note. A slow vehicle turn out lane is designed for slow-moving
vehicles to move into to allow faster vehicles to pass in an adjacent marked
lane.
Keep left unless overtaking sign  |
End keep left unless overtaking sign  | Slow vehicle turn out lane sign  |
Note for
diagrams. There is another permitted version of the end keep left unless
overtaking sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
131 Keeping to the left of oncoming vehicles
(1) A driver must drive to the left of any oncoming vehicle
unless:(a) the driver is turning right at an intersection,
and
(b) the driver is passing an oncoming vehicle turning right at the
intersection, and
(c) there is no traffic sign or road marking indicating that the
driver must pass to the left of the oncoming
vehicle.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Intersection,
oncoming
vehicle, road marking
and traffic
sign are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Part 4, Division 2 deals with making right
turns.
(2) This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor bike that is a
postal vehicle, the rider of a bicycle or the rider of an animal if:(a) the rider is riding on a footpath, nature strip or shared path,
and
(b) the rider is permitted to ride on the footpath, nature strip or
shared path under these Rules or another law of this jurisdiction,
and
(c) either:(i) the oncoming vehicle is not on the footpath, nature strip or
shared path, or
(ii) the oncoming vehicle is not permitted, under these Rules or under
another law of this jurisdiction, to be on the footpath, nature strip or
shared path.
Note. Bicycle, footpath, motor bike,
nature
strip and postal
vehicle are defined in the Dictionary and shared path is
defined in rule 242.
Examples.
Example 1 Driving to the left of an oncoming vehicle  | Example 2 Oncoming vehicles turning right passing to the right of each
other  |
132 Keeping to the left of the centre of a road or the
dividing line
(1) A driver on a two-way road without a dividing line or median strip
must drive to the left of the centre of the road, except as permitted under
rule 133 or 139 (1).Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Centre of the
road, dividing line,
median
strip and two-way road are
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. For the meaning of driving to the left of something, see
rule 351 (3).
Note
3. Rule 133 deals with driving to the right of the centre of the road
to overtake another vehicle, to enter or leave a road, to move from one part
of the road to another, or because of the width or condition of the road. Rule
139 (1) deals with driving to the right of the centre of the road to avoid an
obstruction.
(2) A driver on a road with a dividing line must drive to the left of
the dividing line, except as permitted under rule 134 or 139
(2).Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Rule 134 deals with driving to the right of the dividing line to
overtake another vehicle, to enter or leave a road, or to move from one part
of the road to another. Rule 139 (2) deals with driving to the right of the
dividing line to avoid an obstruction.The effect of this subrule, in relation to continuous dividing
lines, is as follows:
(a) in the case of a dividing line that is only a single continuous
dividing line, or that is a broken dividing line to the right of a single
continuous dividing line, a driver may only drive to the right of such a line
in the circumstances set out in rules 134 (3) and 139 (2), as supplemented by
rule 139 (3),
(b) in the case of a dividing line that is a single continuous
dividing line to the right of a broken dividing line, a driver may only drive
to the right of such a line in the circumstances set out in rules 134 (2), 134
(3) and 139 (2),
(c) in the case of a dividing line that is 2 parallel continuous
dividing lines, a driver may only drive to the right of such a line in the
circumstances set out in rule 139 (2), as supplemented by rule 139
(3).
(2A) A driver on a road with a single continuous dividing line, a
single continuous dividing line to the left of a broken dividing line or 2
parallel continuous dividing lines must not drive across the dividing lines to
perform a U-turn.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Example 1 Driving across a single continuous dividing line to
make a U-turn is not permitted  | Example 2 Driving across a single continuous dividing line to
the left of a broken dividing line to make a U-turn is not
permitted  |
Example 3 Driving across 2 parallel continuous dividing lines to
make a U-turn is not permitted  |
(3) This rule, and rules 133, 134 and 139 (1) and (2), apply to a
service road to which a two-way sign applies as if it were a separate
road, but do not apply to any other service road.Note
1. Service road is
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 136 deals with driving on a service road without a two-way
sign.
(4) In this rule:road
does not include a footpath, nature strip, bicycle path, separated footpath or
shared path.
Note. Footpath and
nature
strip are defined in the Dictionary, bicycle path
and separated
footpath are defined in rule 239 and shared path is
defined in rule 242.
Two-way sign

Note for
diagram. There is another permitted version of the two-way
sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
Examples for
subrule (2).
Example 1 Driving to the left of a single continuous dividing line
only  | Example 2 Driving to the left of a single continuous dividing line to the left
of a broken dividing line  |
Example 3 Driving to the left of 2 parallel continuous dividing
lines  |
133 Exceptions to keeping to the left of the centre of a
road
(1) This rule applies to a driver on a two-way road without a dividing
line or median strip.Note. Dividing line,
median
strip and two-way road are
defined in the Dictionary.
(2) The driver may drive to the right of the centre of the
road:(a) to overtake another driver, or
(b) to enter or leave the road, or
(c) to enter a part of the road of one kind from a part of the road of
another kind (for example, moving to or from a service road or emergency
stopping lane).
Note. Centre of the
road, overtake and
service
road are defined in the Dictionary, and emergency
stopping lane is defined in rule 95.
(3) The driver may also drive to the right of the centre of the road
if:(a) because of the width or condition of the road, it is not
practicable to drive to the left of the centre of the road,
and
(b) the driver can do so safely.
134 Exceptions to keeping to the left of a dividing
line
(1) This rule applies to a driver on a road with a dividing
line.Note. Dividing line
is defined the Dictionary.
(2) If the dividing line is a single broken dividing line only, or a
broken dividing line to the left of a single continuous dividing line, the
driver may drive to the right of the dividing line:(a) to overtake another driver, or
(b) to perform a U-turn, unless another rule would prohibit the driver
performing the U-turn.
Note
1. Overtake is
defined the Dictionary.
Note
2. A driver must not overtake another driver unless the driver has a
clear view of any approaching traffic, and it is safe to overtake the other
driver—see rule 140.
(3) If the dividing line is a single continuous line or broken
dividing line, or a broken dividing line to the left or right of a single
continuous dividing line, the driver may drive to the right of the dividing
line:(a) to enter or leave the road, or
(b) to enter a part of the road of one kind from a part of the road of
another kind (for example, moving to or from a service road or emergency
stopping lane).
Note. Emergency
stopping lane is defined in rule 95, and service road is
defined in the Dictionary.
(3–1) Without limiting subrule (2) or (3), a driver on a road with a
dividing line (whether or not continuous) may drive to the right of the
dividing line to enter or leave the road by the shortest practicable
route.Note. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 134 of the Australian
Road Rules.
Examples.
Example 1 Driving to the right of the centre of the road
permitted—overtaking on a road with a broken dividing line
only  | Example 2 Driving to the right of the centre of the road
permitted—overtaking on a road with a broken dividing line to the left
of a single continuous dividing line  |
Example 2A Driving across a single continuous dividing line is
permitted to enter or leave the road  | Example 2B Driving across a single continuous dividing line is
permitted to leave the road to enter a road related area  |
Example 2C Driving across a single continuous dividing line to
the left of a broken dividing line is permitted to enter or leave the
road  |
Example 3 Driving to the right of the centre of the road not
permitted—overtaking on a road with a single continuous dividing line
only  | Example 4 Driving to the right of the centre of the road not
permitted—overtaking on a road with a single continuous dividing line to
the left of a broken dividing line  |
Example 5 Driving to the right of the centre of the road not
permitted—overtaking on a road with 2 parallel continuous dividing
lines  |
Note on
examples. These examples do not include the crossing of a dividing line as
permitted by subrule (3–1).
135 Keeping to the left of a median strip
(1) A driver on a road with a median strip must drive to the left of
the median strip, unless the driver is:(a) entering or driving in a median strip parking area,
or
(b) required to drive to the right of the median strip by a keep
right sign.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Median strip
and median strip
parking area are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. For the meaning of driving to the left of something, see
rule 351 (3).
(2) In this rule:median
strip does not include a painted island.
Note
1. Painted
island is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 138 deals with keeping off painted
islands.
Keep right sign

136 Driving on a one-way service road
A driver on the part of the road that is a service road (except a
service road to which a two-way sign applies) must drive in the same
direction as a vehicle travelling on the part of the road closest to the
service road is required to travel.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Service
road is defined in the Dictionary.
Two-way sign

Note for
diagram. There is another permitted version of the two-way
sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
137 Keeping off a dividing strip
(1) A driver must not drive on a dividing strip, except as permitted
under this rule or rule 139 (4).Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Dividing
strip is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 139 deals with avoiding obstructions on a
road.
(2) A driver may drive on a dividing strip that is at the same level
as the road, and marked at each side by a continuous line:(a) to enter or leave the road, or
(b) to enter or leave an area on the dividing strip to which a parking
control sign applies if the driver is permitted to park in the
area.
Note
1. Parking control
sign is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Part 12 deals with restrictions on stopping and
parking.
(2A) For the purposes of subrule (2), a dividing strip is to be treated
as being at the same level as the road even if it contains one or more raised
pavement bars or markers.
(3) In this rule:dividing strip
does not include a painted island.
Note
1. Painted
island is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 138 deals with keeping off painted
islands.
138 Keeping off a painted island
(1) A driver must not drive on or over a single continuous line, or 2
parallel continuous lines, along a side of or surrounding a painted island,
except as permitted under this rule or rule 139 (4).Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Painted
island is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 139 deals with avoiding obstructions on a
road.
Example. Painted island surrounded by 2 parallel continuous lines

In this example, vehicle B is contravening the
rule.
(2) A driver may drive on or over a single continuous line along the
side of or surrounding a painted island for up to 50 metres:(a) to enter or leave the road, or
(b) to enter a turning lane that begins immediately after the painted
island.
Note
1. Turning lane is
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 85 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver
entering a turning lane from a painted island and rule 197 deals with stopping
on painted islands.
Note
3. Subrule (3) excludes certain painted islands from the application
of paragraph (a).
(3) Subrule (2) (a) does not apply in the case of a painted
island:(a) that separates a road that takes vehicles in one direction from
another road that takes vehicles in the same direction at a place where the
roads merge, or
(b) that separates one part of a road from other parts of the road to
create a slip lane.
Note. Slip
lane is defined in the Dictionary.
Examples.
Example 1  | Example 2  |
In these examples, vehicle B is contravening the
rule.
139 Exceptions for avoiding obstructions on a road
(1) A driver on a two-way road without a dividing line or median strip
may drive to the right of the centre of the road to avoid an obstruction
if:(a) the driver has a clear view of any approaching traffic,
and
(b) it is necessary and reasonable, in all the circumstances, for the
driver to drive to the right of the centre of the road to avoid the
obstruction, and
(c) the driver can do so safely.
Note. Approaching,
centre of
the road, dividing line,
median
strip, obstruction,
traffic
and two-way
road are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A driver on a road with a dividing line may drive to the right of
the dividing line to avoid an obstruction if:(a) the driver has a clear view of any approaching traffic,
and
(b) it is necessary and reasonable, in all the circumstances, for the
driver to drive to the right of the dividing line to avoid the obstruction,
and
(c) the driver can do so safely.
(3) For subrule (2), if the dividing line is a single continuous
dividing line to the left of a broken dividing line, a single continuous
dividing line only or 2 parallel continuous dividing lines, the hazard in
driving to the right of such a dividing line must be taken into account in
deciding whether it is reasonable to drive to the right of the dividing
line.
(4) A driver may drive on a dividing strip, or on or over a single
continuous line, or 2 parallel continuous lines, along a side of or
surrounding a painted island, to avoid an obstruction if:(a) the driver has a clear view of any approaching traffic,
and
(b) it is necessary and reasonable to drive on the dividing strip or
painted island to avoid the obstruction, and
(c) the driver can do so safely.
Note. Dividing
strip and painted
island are defined in the Dictionary.
Division 3 Overtaking
140 No overtaking unless safe to do so
A driver must not overtake a vehicle unless:(a) the driver has a clear view of any approaching traffic,
and
(b) the driver can safely overtake the
vehicle.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Approaching, overtake and traffic are defined in
the Dictionary.
Note
2. A driver is not permitted to overtake another vehicle by crossing
a single continuous dividing line only, a single continuous dividing line to
the left of a broken dividing line or 2 parallel continuous dividing
lines—see rules 134 (2) and 132 (2).
141 No overtaking etc to the left of a vehicle
(1) A driver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not overtake a
vehicle to the left of the vehicle unless:(a) the driver is driving on a multi-lane road and the vehicle can be
safely overtaken in a marked lane to the left of the vehicle,
or
(b) the vehicle is turning right, or making a U-turn from the centre
of the road, and is giving a right change of direction signal and it is safe
to overtake to the left of the vehicle, or
(c) the vehicle is stationary and it is safe to overtake to the left
of the vehicle.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bicycle, centre of the
road, marked lane,
multi-lane
road, overtake, right
change of direction signal and U-turn are defined in
the Dictionary.
(2) The rider of a bicycle must not ride past, or overtake, to the
left of a vehicle that is turning left and is giving a left change of
direction signal.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Left
change of direction signal is defined in the
Dictionary.
(3) In this rule:turning
right does not include making a hook turn.
vehicle does not include
a tram, a bus travelling along tram tracks, or any vehicle displaying a do
not overtake turning vehicle sign.
Note
1. Bus, tram and travelling
along tram tracks are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note
2. Part 4, Division 3 deals with making hook
turns.
Note
3. Division 7 of this Part deals with overtaking and passing trams
(and buses travelling along tram tracks). Rule 143 deals with overtaking or
passing a vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle
sign.
142 No overtaking to the right of a vehicle turning right
etc
(1) A driver must not overtake to the right of a vehicle if the
vehicle is turning right, or making a U-turn from the centre of the road, and
is giving a right change of direction signal.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Centre of the
road, overtake, right
change of direction signal and U-turn are defined in
the Dictionary.
(2) In this rule:turning
right does not include making a hook turn.
vehicle does not include
a tram, a bus travelling along tram tracks, or any vehicle displaying a do
not overtake turning vehicle sign.
Note
1. Bus, tram and travelling
along tram tracks are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note
2. Part 4, Division 3 deals with making hook
turns.
Note
3. Division 7 of this Part deals with overtaking and passing trams
(and buses travelling along tram tracks). Rule 143 deals with overtaking or
passing a vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle
sign.
143 Passing or overtaking a vehicle displaying a do not
overtake turning vehicle sign
(1) A driver must not drive past, or overtake, to the left of a
vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign if the
vehicle is turning left and is giving a left change of direction signal,
unless it is safe to do so.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Left
change of direction signal and overtake are
defined in the Dictionary.
(1A) A driver must not drive past, or overtake, to the left of a
vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign
unless:(a) the driver is driving on a multi-lane road and the vehicle can be
safely overtaken in a marked lane to the left of the vehicle,
or
(b) the vehicle is turning right, or making a U-turn from the centre
of the road, and is giving a right change of direction signal and it is safe
to overtake to the left of the vehicle, or
(c) the vehicle is stationary and it is safe to overtake to the left
of the vehicle.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Centre of the
road, marked lane,
multi-lane
road, overtake,
right
change of direction signal and U-turn are defined
in the Dictionary.
(2) A driver must not drive past, or overtake, to the right of a
vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign if the
vehicle is turning right, or making a U-turn from the centre of the road, and
is giving a right change of direction signal, unless it is safe to do
so.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Example. A driver driving on a multi-lane road who is turning right at an
intersection to which a right turn only sign applies may drive past a
vehicle displaying a do not overtake turning vehicle sign that is
turning right from another marked lane, and giving a right change of direction
signal, if it is safe to do so.
Note. Centre of the
road, right
change of direction signal and U-turn are defined in
the Dictionary.
(3) In this rule:turning
right does not include making a hook turn.
Note. Part 4, Division 3 deals with making hook
turns.
Do not overtake turning vehicle
signs |

| 
|
Note 1 for
diagrams. These signs are displayed on certain long
vehicles.
Note 2 for
diagrams. These signs must comply with the size requirements set out in rule
316–1.
144 Keeping a safe distance when overtaking
A driver overtaking a vehicle:(a) must pass the vehicle at a sufficient distance to avoid a
collision with the vehicle or obstructing the path of the vehicle,
and
(b) must not return to the marked lane or line of traffic where the
vehicle is travelling until the driver is a sufficient distance past the
vehicle to avoid a collision with the vehicle or obstructing the path of the
vehicle.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Marked
lane and overtake are defined in
the Dictionary.
145 Driver being overtaken not to increase speed
If a driver is overtaking another driver on a two-way road by
crossing a dividing line, or crossing to the right of the centre of the road,
the other driver must not increase the speed at which the driver is driving
until the first driver:(a) has passed the other driver, and
(b) has returned to the marked lane or line of traffic where the other
driver is driving, and
(c) is a sufficient distance in front of the other driver to avoid a
collision.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Centre
of the road, dividing line,
marked lane,
overtake and
two-way road
are defined in the Dictionary.
Division 4 Driving in marked lanes or lines of
traffic
146 Driving within a single marked lane or line of
traffic
(1) A driver on a multi-lane road must drive so the driver’s
vehicle is completely in a marked lane, unless the driver is:(a) entering a part of the road of one kind from a part of the road of
another kind (for example, moving to or from a service road or a shoulder of
the road), or
(b) entering or leaving the road, or
(c) moving from one marked lane to another marked lane,
or
(d) avoiding an obstruction, or
(e) obeying a traffic control device applying to the marked lane,
or
(f) permitted to drive in more than one marked lane under another
provision of these Rules or under another law of this
jurisdiction.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Driver’s
vehicle, marked lane,
multi-lane
road, obstruction,
service
road and traffic control
device are defined in the Dictionary and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
Note
2. A driver is generally not permitted to move from one marked lane
to another marked lane across a continuous line separating the lanes—see
rule 147.
Note
3. Rule 148 deals with giving way when moving from one marked lane to
another marked lane.
Note
4. An overhead lane control device may require a driver to leave a
marked lane—see rule 152.
Note
5. Drivers of certain long vehicles are permitted to use 2 marked
lanes when turning at an intersection—see rule 28 (left turns) and rule
32 (right turns).
(2) A driver on a road with 2 or more lines of traffic travelling in
the same direction as the driver, but without marked lanes, must drive so the
driver’s vehicle is completely in a single line of traffic
unless:(a) it is not practicable to drive completely in a single line of
traffic, or
(b) the driver is entering a part of the road of one kind from a part
of the road of another kind (for example, moving to or from a service road or
a shoulder of the road), or
(c) the driver is entering or leaving the road, or
(d) the driver is moving from one line of traffic to another line of
traffic, or
(e) the driver is avoiding an obstruction.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Rule 148 deals with giving way when moving from one line of
traffic to another line of traffic.
147 Moving from one marked lane to another marked lane across
a continuous line separating the lanes
A driver on a multi-lane road must not move from one marked lane
to another marked lane by crossing a continuous line separating the lanes
unless:(a) the driver is avoiding an obstruction, or
(b) the driver is obeying a traffic control device applying to the
first marked lane, or
(c) the driver is permitted to drive in both marked lanes under
another provision of these Rules or under another law of this jurisdiction,
or
(d) either of the marked lanes is a special purpose lane in which the
driver is permitted to drive under these Rules and the driver is moving to or
from the special purpose lane.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Marked
lane, multi-lane road,
obstruction,
special purpose
lane and traffic control
device are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. An overhead lane control device may require a driver to leave a
marked lane—see rule 152.
Note
3. Drivers of certain long vehicles are permitted to use 2 marked
lanes when turning at an intersection—see rule 28 (left turns) and rule
32 (right turns).
Note
4. Rule 95 deals with driving in emergency stopping lanes, and
Division 6 of this Part deals with driving in other special purpose
lanes.
148 Giving way when moving from one marked lane or line of
traffic to another marked lane or line of traffic
(1) A driver who is moving from one marked lane (whether or not the
lane is ending) to another marked lane must give way to any vehicle travelling
in the same direction as the driver in the marked lane to which the driver is
moving.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Marked lane and
multi-lane
road are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. For this rule, give way means the
driver must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see
the definition in the Dictionary.
Examples.
Giving way when moving from one marked lane to
another marked lane |
Example 1  | Example 2  |
In these examples, vehicle B must give way to vehicle
A.
(2) A driver on a road with 2 or more lines of traffic travelling in
the same direction as the driver, and who is moving from one line of traffic
to another line of traffic, must give way to any vehicle travelling in the
same direction as the driver in the line of traffic to which the driver is
moving.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) Subrule (2) does not apply to a driver if the line of traffic in
which the driver is driving is merging with the line of traffic to which the
driver is moving.Note. Rule 149 deals with giving way when lines of traffic
merge.
Example. Giving way when moving from one line of traffic to another line of
traffic when the lines are not merging

In this example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle
A
148A Giving way when moving within a single marked
lane
If a driver diverges to the left or right within a marked lane,
the driver must give way to any vehicle that is in the lane.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Marked
lane is defined in the Dictionary.
149 Giving way when lines of traffic merge into a single line
of traffic
A driver in a line of traffic that is merging with one or more
lines of traffic travelling in the same direction as the driver must give way
to a vehicle in another line of traffic if any part of the vehicle is ahead of
the driver’s vehicle.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Driver’s
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. For this rule, give way means the driver
must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the
definition in the Dictionary.
Example. Giving way when lines of traffic merge into a single line of
traffic

In this example, vehicle B must give way to vehicle
A.
150 Driving on or across a continuous white edge
line
(1) A driver must not drive on or over a continuous white edge line on
a road unless subrule (1A) or (1B) applies to the driver.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Edge
line is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. A driver must not stop at the side of a road marked with a
continuous yellow edge line—see rule 169.
(1A) A driver may drive on or over a continuous white edge line on a
road if the driver is:(a) overtaking a vehicle that is turning right, or making a U-turn
from the centre of the road, and is giving a right change of direction signal,
or
(b) driving a slow-moving vehicle, and it is necessary for the driver
to drive on or over the edge line to allow the vehicle to be overtaken or
passed by another vehicle, or
(c) driving a vehicle that is too wide, or too long, to drive on the
road without driving on or over the edge line, or
(d) carrying out functions under the road transport legislation or
complying with a direction given by a police officer or other person carrying
out functions under the road transport legislation, or
(e) avoiding an obstruction.
Note
1. Centre of the
road, obstruction,
overtake,
right
change of direction signal, road
transport legislation and U-turn are defined
in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Subrule (1A) (d) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph
in rule 150 of the Australian Road
Rules. However, the corresponding paragraph in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of
this jurisdiction to permit a driver to drive on or over a continuous white
edge line on a road. Different rules may apply in other Australian
jurisdictions.
(1B) A driver may drive on or over a continuous white edge line on a
road for up to 100 metres if the driver is:(a) turning at an intersection, or
(b) entering or leaving the road, or
(c) entering a part of the road of one kind from a part of the road of
another kind (for example, moving to or from a service road, a shoulder of the
road or an emergency stopping lane), or
(d) stopping at the side of the road (including any shoulder of the
road).
Note. Intersection
and service
road are defined in the Dictionary, emergency
stopping lane is defined in rule 95, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
(2) This rule does not apply to the rider of a bicycle or
animal.Note. Bicycle is defined
in the Dictionary.
(3) For this rule, a driver drives over a continuous white edge line
on a road if:(a) for a line on the far left side of the road—the
driver’s vehicle is wholly or partly to the left of the line,
or
(b) for a line on the far right side of the road—the
driver’s vehicle is wholly or partly to the right of the
line.
151 Riding a motor bike or bicycle alongside more than 1
other rider
(1) The rider of a motor bike or bicycle must not ride on a road that
is not a multi-lane road alongside more than 1 other rider, unless subrule (3)
applies to the rider.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bicycle, motor bike and
multi-lane
road are defined in the Dictionary, and rider is defined in
rule 17.
(2) The rider of a motor bike or bicycle must not ride in a marked
lane alongside more than 1 other rider in the marked lane, unless subrule (3)
applies to the rider.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Marked lane is
defined in the Dictionary.
(3) The rider of a motor bike or bicycle may ride alongside more than
1 other rider if the rider is:(a) overtaking the other riders, or
(b) permitted to do so under another law of this
jurisdiction.
Note. Overtake is
defined in the Dictionary.
(4) If the rider of a motor bike or bicycle is riding on a road that
is not a multi-lane road alongside another rider, or in a marked lane
alongside another rider in the marked lane, the rider must ride not over 1.5
metres from the other rider.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(5) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area, but includes a bicycle path, shared path
and any shoulder of the road.
Note. Bicycle path is
defined in rule 239, road related
area is defined in rule 13, shared path is
defined in rule 242, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
Division 5 Obeying overhead lane control devices applying to
marked lanes
152 Complying with overhead lane control devices
(1) A driver in a marked lane to which an overhead lane control device
applies must comply with this rule.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Marked lane and
overhead
lane control device are defined in the
Dictionary.
(2) If the device displays an illuminated red diagonal cross or is a
traffic sign displaying a red diagonal cross, the driver must not drive in the
marked lane past the device.
(3) If the device displays a flashing illuminated red diagonal cross,
the driver must leave the marked lane as soon as it is safe to do
so.
(4) If the device displays an illuminated white, green or yellow arrow
pointing downwards or indicating one or more directions, the driver may drive
in the marked lane past the device.
Example. Overhead lane control device applying to marked lanes

Note for
diagram. If the device displays an arrow indicating one or more directions,
the device operates also as traffic lane arrows—see the definition of
traffic lane
arrows in the Dictionary. Rule 92 deals with traffic lane
arrows.
Division 6 Driving in marked lanes designated for special
purposes
153 Bicycle lanes
(1) A driver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not drive in a
bicycle lane, unless the driver is permitted to drive in the bicycle lane
under this rule or rule 158.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Bicycle is defined
in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 158 provides additional exceptions applying to this rule, and
also provides a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against
this rule.
(2) If stopping or parking is permitted at a place in a bicycle lane
under another law of this jurisdiction, a driver may drive for up to 50 metres
in the bicycle lane to stop or park at that place.Note. Part 12 deals with parking and restricted stopping
areas.
(3) A driver may drive for up to 50 metres in a bicycle lane
if:(a) the driver is driving a public bus, public minibus or taxi, and is
dropping off or picking up, passengers, and
(b) there is not another law of this jurisdiction prohibiting the
driver from driving in the bicycle lane.
Note
1. Public
bus and taxi are defined in
the Dictionary.
Note
2. The term public
minibus is not a term that is used in this jurisdiction. The
reference to that term in this subrule is retained in order to preserve
uniformity with the Australian Road
Rules.
(4) A bicycle
lane is a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane:(a) beginning at a bicycle lane sign applying to the lane,
and
(b) ending at the nearest of the following:(i) an end bicycle lane sign applying to the
lane,
(ii) an intersection (unless the lane is at the unbroken side of the
continuing road at a T-intersection or continued across the intersection by
broken lines),
(iii) if the road ends at a dead end—the end of the
road.
Note. Continuing
road, intersection,
marked
lane and T-intersection
are defined in the Dictionary.
Bicycle lane sign  | End bicycle lane sign  |
154 Bus lanes
(1) A driver (except the driver of a public bus) must not drive in a
bus lane, unless the driver is permitted to drive in the bus lane under rule
158.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Public
bus is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 158 provides additional exceptions applying to this rule, and
also provides a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against
this rule.
(2) A bus
lane is a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane:(a) beginning at a bus lane sign (whether or not there is also
a bus lane road marking) and ending at the nearest of the following:(i) an end bus lane sign,
(ii) a traffic sign that indicates the beginning of another special
purpose lane, or
(b) beginning at a bus lane road marking (if there is no bus lane
sign) and ending at the next intersection.
Note. Intersection,
marked
lane, special purpose
lane and traffic sign
are defined in the Dictionary.
(3) In this rule:bus lane road
marking means a road marking consisting of:
(a) the letters “BL”, or
(b) the words “bus lane”, or
(c) the words “bus only” or “buses
only”.
Note. Road
marking is defined in the Dictionary.
Bus lane signs |
Bus lane sign  | Bus lane sign  |
End bus lane signs |
End bus lane sign  | End bus lane sign  |
Note for
diagrams. There are a number of other permitted versions of bus lane
signs—see the diagrams in Schedule 3.
155 Tram lanes
(1) A driver (except the driver of a tram, tram recovery vehicle or
public bus) must not drive in a tram lane, unless the driver is permitted to
drive in the tram lane under this rule or rule 158.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Public
bus, tram and tram recovery
vehicle are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 158 provides additional exceptions applying to this rule, and
also provides a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against
this rule.
(2) A driver may drive in a tram lane if the driver is driving a truck
and it is necessary for the driver to drive in the tram lane to reach a place
to drop off, or pick up, passengers or goods.
(3) A tram
lane is a part of a road with tram tracks that:(a) is between a tram lane sign and an end tram lane
sign, and
(b) is marked along the left side of the tracks (when facing the
direction of travel of a tram on the tracks) by a continuous yellow line
parallel to the tracks.
Note. Tram
tracks is defined in the Dictionary.
Tram lane sign  | End tram lane sign  |
Example. Tram lane

155A Tramways
(1) A driver (except the driver of a tram, tram recovery vehicle or
public bus) must not drive in a tramway, unless the driver is permitted to
drive in the tramway under subrule (2).Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Public bus,
tram and
tram
recovery vehicle are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note
2. The exceptions and defence provided in rule 158 do not apply to
tramways.
(2) A driver may drive in a tramway if:(a) it is necessary for the driver to drive in the tramway to avoid an
obstruction, and
(b) when driving in the tramway, the driver does not move into the
path of an approaching tram or public bus travelling in the
tramway.
Note. Obstruction is
defined in the Dictionary.
(3) A tramway is a part of a
road with tram tracks that:(a) is between a tramway sign and an end tramway sign,
and
(b) is marked along the left side of the tracks (when facing the
direction of travel of a tram on the tracks) by either:(i) 2 continuous yellow lines parallel to the tracks,
or
(ii) a structure (for example, a dividing strip, pedestrian refuge,
traffic island, row of bollards or separation kerb), whether or not the
structure is also being used to indicate a safety
zone,
but does include any part of the road where vehicles are permitted to
cross the tramway.
(4) For the purposes of subparagraph (3) (b) (i), a line is to be
considered to be continuous despite any break in it that is designed to permit
vehicles to cross the tramway.Note. Dividing
strip, traffic
island and tram tracks are
defined in the Dictionary and safety zone is
defined in rule 162.
Tramway sign  | End tramway sign  |
Examples.
Tramway with double yellow line  | Tramway with separation kerb  |
156 Transit lanes
(1) A driver must not drive in a transit lane unless:(a) the driver is driving:(i) a public bus, public minibus, motor bike, taxi or tram,
or
(ii) if the transit lane sign applying to the transit lane is a
transit lane (T2) sign—a vehicle carrying at least 1 other
person, or
(iii) if the transit lane sign applying to the transit lane is a
transit lane (T3) sign—a vehicle carrying at least 2 other
people, or
(b) the driver is permitted to drive in the transit lane under rule
158.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Motor
bike, public bus,
taxi and
tram are
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. The term public
minibus is not a term that is used in this jurisdiction. The
reference to that term in this subrule is retained in order to preserve
uniformity with the Australian Road
Rules.
Note
3. Rule 158 provides additional exceptions applying to this rule, and
also provides a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against
this rule.
(2) A transit
lane is a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane:(a) beginning at a transit lane sign, and
(b) ending at an end transit lane
sign.
Note. Marked lane is
defined in the Dictionary.
Transit lane signs |
Transit lane (T2) sign  | Transit lane (T3) sign  |
End transit lane
signs |
End transit lane (T2) sign  | End transit lane (T3) sign  |
Note for
diagrams. There are a number of other permitted versions of the transit
lane sign—see the diagrams in Schedule 3.
157 Truck lanes
(1) A driver (except the driver of a truck) must not drive in a truck
lane, unless the driver is permitted to drive in the truck lane under rule
158.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Truck is defined in
the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 158 provides additional exceptions applying to this rule, and
also provides a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence against
this rule.
(2) A truck
lane is a marked lane, or the part of a marked lane:(a) beginning at a truck lane sign, and
(b) ending at an end truck lane
sign.
Note. Marked lane is
defined in the Dictionary.
Truck lane sign  | End truck lane sign  |
157–1 NSW rule: T-Way lanes
(cf RRR, cl 96B)
(1) A driver (except the driver of an authorised T-Way vehicle) must
not drive in a T-Way lane.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) A driver (except the driver of an authorised T-Way vehicle) must
not stop in a T-Way lane.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) A T-Way
lane is a marked lane, or part of a marked lane:(a) beginning with a T-Way lane sign, and
(b) ending with the nearest of the following:(i) an end T-Way lane sign,
(ii) an intersection.
Note. Marked lane and
intersection
are defined in the Dictionary.
T-Way lane sign  | End T-Way lane sign  |
(4) In this rule:authorised T-Way
vehicle means a vehicle (or a vehicle belonging to a class of
vehicles) approved by the Authority that displays in a prominent position on
the vehicle adjacent to each number-plate an authorised T-Way vehicle label or
plate.
Authorised T-Way vehicle label or plate  |
Note for diagram. This label or plate is displayed on certain
vehicles.
Note 1. Authority
is defined in the Act.
Note
2. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
158 Exceptions to driving in special purpose lanes
etc
(1) The driver of any vehicle may drive for up to the permitted
distance in a bicycle lane, bus lane, tram lane, transit lane or truck lane if
it is necessary for the driver to drive in the lane:(a) to enter or leave the road, or
(b) to enter a part of the road of one kind from a part of the road of
another kind (for example, moving to or from a service road, the shoulder of
the road or an emergency stopping lane), or
(c) to overtake a vehicle that is turning right, or making a U-turn
from the centre of the road, and is giving a right change of direction signal,
or
(d) to enter a marked lane, or part of the road where there is room
for a line of traffic (other than motor bikes, bicycles, motorised wheelchairs
or animals), from the side of the road.
Note
1. Permitted
distance is defined in subrule (4).
Note
2. Bicycle lane is
defined in rule 153, bus lane is defined
in rule 154, emergency
stopping lane is defined in rule 95, centre of the
road, marked lane,
overtake,
right
change of direction signal, service road
and U-turn
are defined in the Dictionary, shoulder is
defined in rule 12, tram lane is
defined in rule 155, transit lane is
defined in rule 156, and truck lane is
defined in rule 157.
Note
3. A driver must keep clear of a tram travelling in a tram
lane—see rule 76.
(1–1) Subrule (1) does not apply to a driver in a bus only
lane.Note. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 158 of the Australian
Road Rules.
(2) The driver of any vehicle may drive in a bicycle lane, bus lane,
tram lane, transit lane or truck lane if:(a) it is necessary for the driver to drive in the lane to avoid an
obstruction, or
(b) information on or with a traffic sign applying to the lane
indicates that the driver may drive in the lane, or
(c) the driver is:(i) riding a bicycle in a bus lane (other than a bus only lane), tram
lane, transit lane or truck lane, or
(ii) driving a taxi or motor bike in a bus lane (other than a bus only
lane), or
(iii) driving a special purpose vehicle in a bus lane, tram lane,
transit lane or truck lane, or
(iv) driving an NRMA Road Patrol vehicle in a transit lane while on
duty with the NRMA Road Patrol service and is responding to an urgent or
priority call, or
(v) driving a police vehicle, ambulance or fire brigade vehicle in a
transit lane or bus lane (other than a bus only lane) while returning to base
after proceeding to the scene of an accident or other emergency,
or
(vi) driving a vehicle in a bus lane (other than a bus only lane), tram
lane, transit lane or truck lane where vehicle is being operated by or at the
direction of the Authority for the purpose of conducting road and traffic
surveys.
Note
1. Obstruction,
traffic
sign and with are defined in
the Dictionary, and Authority is
defined in the Act.
Note
2. Subrule (2) (c) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in
rule 158 of the Australian Road
Rules. However, the corresponding paragraph in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of
this jurisdiction to permit a driver to drive in special purpose lanes.
Different rules may apply in other Australian
jurisdictions.
(3) It is a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence
against a provision of this Division for driving in a bicycle lane, bus lane,
tram lane, transit lane or truck lane if:(a) it is necessary for the driver to drive in the lane to stop at a
place in the lane, and
(b) the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules or
another law of this jurisdiction, or it is a defence under rule 165 for the
driver to stop at that place, and
(c) if the lane is a bicycle lane—the driver drives in the lane
for no more than the permitted distance.
Note. Rule 165 provides a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an
offence against a provision of Part 12 (Restrictions on stopping and parking).
The defence is available, for example, if the driver needs to stop to deal
with a medical or other emergency.
(4) In this rule:bus only
lane means:
(a) a bus lane beginning at a bus lane sign where the words
“bus only” or “buses only” appear on or with the sign,
or
(b) a bus lane beginning at a bus lane road marking where the road
marking consists of the words “bus only” or “buses
only”.
Note 1. Bus
lane and bus
lane road marking are defined in rule 154.
Note 2. There is no corresponding definition for this term for the
purposes of rule 158 of the Australian Road
Rules. The definition is required for the purposes of subrule
(2) (c).
permitted
distance means:
(a) for a bicycle lane or a tram lane—50 metres,
or
(b) for any other lane—100 metres.
special purpose
vehicle means a motor vehicle (whether a tow truck, a vehicle used
for repairing traffic control light signals or another vehicle) being operated
by or at the direction of the Authority and proceeding to the scene of an
accident or other emergency.
Note 1. Authority
is defined in the Act.
Note 2. There is no corresponding definition for this term for the
purposes of rule 158 of the Australian Road
Rules. The definition is required for the purposes of subrule
(2) (c).
159 Marked lanes required to be used by particular kinds of
vehicles
(1) If information on or with a traffic sign applying to a length of
road indicates that a vehicle of a particular kind must drive in a particular
marked lane, a driver driving a vehicle of that kind on the length of road
must drive in the indicated lane, unless the driver is:(a) avoiding an obstruction, or
(b) obeying a traffic control device applying to the indicated lane,
or
(c) permitted to drive in the indicated lane and also another marked
lane under another provision of these Rules or under another law of this
jurisdiction, or
(d) intending to turn off the road or to make a U-turn, and in order
to do so safely without disrupting other vehicles on the road it is necessary
to position the vehicle in another lane before starting the turn, or to make
the turn.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Length of road,
marked
lane, obstruction,
traffic
control device, traffic sign
and with are
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. An overhead lane control device may require a driver to leave a
marked lane—see rule 152.
Note
3. Drivers of certain long vehicles are permitted to use 2 marked
lanes when turning at an intersection—see rule 28 (left turns) and rule
32 (right turns).
(2) A traffic sign mentioned in this rule that is on a road applies to
the length of road beginning at the sign and ending at the nearest of the
following:(a) a traffic sign or road marking on the road that indicates that the
first traffic sign no longer applies,
(b) the next intersection on the road,
(c) if the road ends at a T-intersection or dead end—the end of
the road.
Note
1. Intersection,
road
marking, T-intersection
and traffic
sign are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 322 (1) and (2) deal with the meaning of a traffic sign
on a road.
Examples of a
traffic sign mentioned in the rule and a traffic sign indicating that the
first traffic sign no longer applies.
Trucks use left lane sign  | End trucks use left lane sign  |
Note for
diagrams. There are other permitted versions of these signs—see the
diagrams in Schedule 3.
Division 7 Passing trams and safety zones
Note. Bus, tram, tram tracks and travelling along tram
tracks are defined in the Dictionary.
160 Passing or overtaking a tram that is not at or near the
left side of a road
(1) This rule applies to a driver driving on a road with tram tracks
that are not at or near the far left side of the
road.
(2) The driver must not drive past, or overtake, a tram to the right
of the tram, unless the driver is permitted to do so by a traffic sign or road
marking.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Overtake is
defined in the Dictionary.
(3) The driver must not drive past, or overtake, a tram if the tram is
turning left or is giving a left change of direction signal, unless the driver
is turning left and there is no danger of a collision with the
tram.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Left
change of direction signal is defined in the
Dictionary.
(4) In this rule:tram
includes a bus travelling along tram tracks.
161 Passing or overtaking a tram at or near the left side of
a road
(1) This rule applies to a driver driving on a road with tram tracks
at or near the far left side of the road.
(2) The driver must not drive past, or overtake, a tram to the left of
the tram unless the driver is turning left and there is no danger of a
collision with the tram.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) The driver must not drive past, or overtake, a tram if the tram is
turning right or is giving a right change of direction signal.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Right
change of direction signal is defined in the
Dictionary.
(4) In this rule:tram
includes a bus travelling along tram tracks.
162 Driving past a safety zone
(1) A driver driving past a safety zone:(a) must not drive on the safety zone, and
(b) must drive to the left of the safety zone at a speed that does not
put at risk the safety of any pedestrian crossing the road to or from the
safety zone.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) A safety
zone is an area of a road:(a) at a place with safety zone signs at or near a tram stop,
and
(b) indicated by a structure on the road (for example, a dividing
strip, pedestrian refuge or traffic island).
Note. Dividing
strip and traffic
island are defined in the Dictionary.
Safety zone sign  |
163 Driving past the rear of a stopped tram at a tram
stop
(1) A driver must comply with this rule if:(a) the driver is driving behind the rear of a tram travelling in the
same direction as the driver, and
(b) the tram stops at a tram stop, except at the far left side of the
road, and
(c) there is no safety zone, dividing strip or traffic island between
the tram and the part of the road where the driver is driving,
and
(d) there is no other law of this jurisdiction (other than subrule
(5)) that permits the driver to pass the tram without
stopping.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Dividing
strip, traffic
island and tram stop are
defined in the Dictionary, and safety zone is
defined in rule 162.
(2) The driver must stop before passing the rear of the
tram.
(3) After stopping in accordance with subrule (2), the driver must not
proceed if:(a) one or more of the doors on the side of the tram closest to the
driver are open or opening, or
(b) a pedestrian is entering or crossing the road between the tram
tracks and the far left side of the road.
(4) After stopping in accordance with subrule (2), if the tram remains
at the tram stop and subrule (3) (a) and (b) do not apply, the driver must not
proceed past the tram at a speed greater than 10 kilometres per
hour.
(5) However, subrules (2), (3) and (4) do not apply if the driver is
directed to drive past the tram by an authorised
person.
(6) In this rule:tram
includes a bus travelling along tram tracks.
164 Stopping beside a stopped tram at a tram stop
(1) A driver must comply with this rule if:(a) the driver is driving alongside, or overtaking, a tram travelling
in the same direction as the driver, and
(b) the tram stops at a tram stop, except at the far left side of the
road, and
(c) there is no safety zone, dividing strip or traffic island between
the tram and the part of the road where the driver is driving,
and
(d) there is no other law of this jurisdiction (other than subrule
(5)) that permits the driver to pass the tram without
stopping.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Dividing
strip, traffic
island and tram stop are
defined in the Dictionary, and safety zone is
defined in rule 162.
(2) The driver must stop.
(3) After stopping in accordance with subrule (2), the driver must not
proceed if:(a) one or more of the doors on the side of the tram closest to the
driver are open or opening, or
(b) a pedestrian is entering or crossing the road between the tram
tracks and the far left side of the road.
(4) After stopping in accordance with subrule (2), if the tram remains
at the tram stop and subrule (3) (a) and (b) do not apply, the driver must not
proceed past the tram at a speed greater than 10 kilometres per
hour.
(5) However, subrules (2), (3) and (4) do not apply if the driver is
directed to drive past the tram by an authorised
person.
(6) In this rule:tram
includes a bus travelling along tram tracks.
164A Staying stopped if a tram comes from behind a stopped
driver and stops
(1) A driver must comply with this rule if:(a) the driver is stopped beside a tram stop, and
(b) a tram stops at the tram stop, except at the far left side of the
road, and
(c) there is no safety zone, dividing strip or traffic island between
the tram and the part of the road where the driver is driving,
and
(d) there is no other law of this jurisdiction (other than subrule
(4)) that permits the driver to proceed past the
tram.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Dividing
strip, traffic
island and tram stop are
defined in the Dictionary, and safety zone is
defined in rule 162.
(2) The driver must not proceed if:(a) one or more of the doors on the side of the tram closest to the
driver are open or opening, or
(b) a pedestrian is entering or crossing the road between the tram
tracks and the far left side of the road.
(3) If the tram remains at the tram stop and subrules (2) (a) and (b)
do not apply, the driver must not proceed past the tram at a speed greater
than 10 kilometres per hour.
(4) However, subrules (2) and (3) do not apply if the driver is
directed to proceed past the tram by an authorised
person.
(5) In this rule:tram
includes a bus travelling along tram tracks.
Part 12 Restrictions on stopping and parking
Division 1 General
Note 1. For the general rules about the application of traffic signs
(including parking control signs), see Part 20, Divisions 2 and 3 especially
rules 332 to 335 and 346. Parking control signs often include information
about the times they apply and the types of vehicles to which they do not
apply—see rules 317 and 318. For the meaning of abbreviations and
symbols on parking control signs, see rule 347 and Schedule
1.
Note 2. Park and
stop are defined in the
Dictionary.
165 Stopping in an emergency etc or to comply with another
rule
It is a defence to the prosecution of a driver for an offence
against a provision of this Part if:(a) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way, to
avoid a collision, and the driver stops for no longer than is necessary to
avoid the collision, or
(b) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way,
because the driver’s vehicle is disabled, and the driver stops for no
longer than is necessary for the vehicle to be moved safely to a place where
the driver is permitted to park the vehicle under these Rules,
or
(c) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way, to
deal with a medical or other emergency, or to assist a disabled vehicle, and
the driver stops for no longer than is necessary in the circumstances,
or
(d) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way,
because the condition of the driver, a passenger, or the driver’s
vehicle makes it necessary for the driver to stop in the interests of safety,
and the driver stops for no longer than is necessary in the circumstances,
or
(e) the driver stops at a particular place, or in a particular way, to
comply with another provision of these Rules or a provision of another law,
and the driver stops for no longer than is necessary to comply with the other
provision.
Example for
paragraph (e). If a driver stops at an intersection at a stop line, stop
sign, or traffic lights, or to give way to a vehicle, in accordance with
these Rules, the driver does not contravene rule 170 (stopping in or near an
intersection).
Note
1. See rule 125 (in Part 11) for the offence of unreasonably
obstructing the path of another vehicle or a pedestrian.
Note
2. Driver’s
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
166 Application of Part to bicycles
This Part does not apply to a bicycle that is parked at a bicycle
rail or in a bicycle rack.Note. Bicycle is defined in the
Dictionary.
Division 2 No stopping and no parking signs and road
markings
Note 1. Area, length of road, park and stop are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 165 provides defences to the prosecution of a driver for an
offence against a provision of this Division.
167 No stopping signs
A driver must not stop on a length of road or in an area to which
a no stopping sign applies.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Rule 167–1 provides for transitional arrangements dealing
with no standing signs. Rule 167–2 permits a taxi driver to drop
off or pick up passengers or luggage in Central Sydney on lengths of roads or
areas to which a no stopping sign applies.
No stopping signs |
No stopping sign (for a length of road)  | No stopping sign (for an area)  |
Note 1 for
diagrams. There is another permitted version of the no stopping sign
(for a length of road)—see the diagram in Schedule 3 and rule
167–1.
Note 2 for
diagrams. A no stopping sign may have an arrow pointing in a
different direction and anything on the sign may be differently
arranged—see rule 316 (4).
167–1 NSW rule: no standing signs
(cf RRR, cl 16)
(1) Despite rule 167, a driver is permitted to stop on a length of
road or in an area to which a no stopping sign applies (being a sign on
which the words “no standing” appear) for the purpose of dropping
off, or picking up, passengers.Note
1. Rule 167 provides that a driver must not stop on a length of road
or in an area to which a no stopping sign applies. This rule and rule
167–2 provide for exceptions to rule 167.
Note
2. A no standing sign is a no stopping sign for the
purposes of these Rules—see the diagram in Schedule
3.
(2) Subrule (1) ceases to have effect on 1 December
2008.Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules. However, rule 167 of the Australian Road Rules allows another law of
this jurisdiction to provide for transitional arrangements dealing with no
standing signs.
167–2 NSW rule: taxis stopping in Central Sydney Taxi
Zone
(cf RRR, cl 6 of Sch 1)
(1) Despite rule 167, the driver of a taxi is permitted to stop on a
road or in an area to which a no stopping sign applies and that is
located within the Central Sydney Taxi Zone if:(a) the sign displays a reference to particular days or times when
restrictions on stopping apply, and
(b) the driver is stopping for the sole purpose of dropping off, or
picking up, passengers or luggage, and
(c) the driver stops for a period not exceeding one
minute.
Note. Rule 167 provides that a driver must not stop on a length of road
or in an area to which a no stopping sign applies. This rule and rule
167–1 provide for exceptions to rule 167.
(2) Nothing in this rule limits rule
167–1.
(3) In this rule:Central Sydney Taxi
Zone:
(a) consists of that area within the City of Sydney bounded by the
Harbour from Day Street, Darling Harbour, in the west to the Opera House in
the north, and thence along Macquarie Street, Prince Albert Road, College
Street, Wentworth Avenue and Elizabeth Street in the east, Eddy Avenue, Pitt
Street, Railway Square and Broadway in the south, and Harris Street, William
Henry Street, Pier Street, Harbour Street and Day Street in the west,
returning to the waterfront at Darling Harbour, and
(b) includes those named roads specified as constituting the boundary
of the area.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
168 No parking signs
(1) The driver of a vehicle must not stop on a length of road or in an
area to which a no parking sign applies, unless the driver:(a) is dropping off, or picking up, passengers or goods,
and
(b) does not leave the vehicle unattended, and
(c) completes the dropping off, or picking up, of the passengers or
goods, and drives on, as soon as possible and, in any case, within the
required time after stopping.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) For this rule, a driver leaves a vehicle unattended if the
driver leaves the vehicle so the driver is over 3 metres from the closest
point of the vehicle.
(3) In this rule:required
time means:
(a) if information on or with the sign indicates a time—the
indicated time, or
(b) if there is no indicated time—2 minutes,
or
(c) if there is no indicated time, or the indicated time is less than
5 minutes, and rule 206 applies to the driver—5
minutes.
Note
1. With is defined in the
Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 206 applies to a driver if the driver’s vehicle
displays a current parking permit for people with disabilities and the driver
complies with the conditions of use of the permit—see rule 206
(1).
No parking signs |
No parking sign (for a length of road)  | No parking sign (for an area)  |
Note 1 for
diagrams. There is another permitted version of the no parking
sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for
diagrams. A no parking sign may have an arrow pointing in a different
direction and anything on the sign may be differently arranged—see rule
316 (4).
168–1 NSW rule: restricted parking areas
(cf RRR, cl 60)
(1) The driver of a vehicle (other than a public utility service
vehicle) must not stop in a restricted parking area, unless the driver
is:(a) stopping in a parking station or in accordance with the directions
marked on (or on a sign displayed adjacent to) a parking bay,
or
(b) actually engaged in dropping off, or picking up, passengers or
goods.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Parking bay,
stop,
public
utility service vehicle and vehicle are
defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A restricted parking
area is an area with:(a) a restricted parking area sign on each road into the area,
and
(b) an end restricted parking area sign on each road out of the
area.
(3) In this rule:vehicle does not
include a bicycle or animal that is being ridden.
Restricted parking area sign  | End restricted parking area sign  |
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
169 No stopping on a road with a yellow edge line
A driver must not stop at the side of a road marked with a
continuous yellow edge line.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Edge
line is defined in the Dictionary.
Division 3 Stopping at intersections and crossings
Note 1. Area, length of road, park and stop are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 165 provides defences to the prosecution of a driver for an
offence against a provision of this Division.
170 Stopping in or near an intersection
(1) A driver must not stop in an intersection unless:(a) the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules,
or
(b) the intersection is a T-intersection without traffic lights and
the driver stops along the continuous side of the continuing road at the
intersection.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Continuing
road, intersection
and T-intersection
are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A driver must not stop on a road within 20 metres from the nearest
point of an intersecting road at an intersection with traffic lights, unless
the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a
parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place
under these Rules.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Parking control
sign and traffic
lights are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. A driver stops within a particular distance from an intersection
if the driver stops so any part of the driver’s vehicle is within that
distance—see rule 350 (2).
(3) A driver must not stop on a road within 10 metres from the nearest
point of an intersecting road at an intersection without traffic lights,
unless the driver stops:(a) at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking
control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under
these Rules, or
(b) if the intersection is a T-intersection—along the continuous
side of the continuing road at the intersection.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Continuing
road and T-intersection
are defined in the Dictionary.
(4) For this rule, distances are measured in the direction in which
the driver is driving, and:(a) for subrule (2)—as shown in example 1,
or
(b) for subrule (3)—as shown in example
2.
(5) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note. Road related
area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
Examples.
Example 1 Measurement of distance—intersection with traffic
lights  |
Example 2 Measurement of distance—T-intersection without traffic
lights  |
171 Stopping on or near a children’s
crossing
(1) A driver must not stop on a children’s crossing, or on the
road within 20 metres before the crossing and 10 metres after the crossing,
unless the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to
which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at
that place under these Rules.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Children’s
crossing is defined in rule 80, and parking control
sign is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. A driver stops within a particular distance from a
children’s crossing if the driver stops so any part of the
driver’s vehicle is within that distance—see rule 350
(2).
(2) For this rule, distances are measured:(a) in the direction in which the driver is driving,
and
(b) as shown in example 1 or 2.
(3) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note. Road related
area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
Examples.
Example 1 Measurement of distance—children’s crossing with red and
white posts  |
Example 2 Measurement of distance—children’s crossing with 2
parallel continuous or broken lines  |
172 Stopping on or near a pedestrian crossing (except at an
intersection)
(1) A driver must not stop on a pedestrian crossing that is not at an
intersection, or on the road within 20 metres before the crossing and 10
metres after the crossing, unless the driver stops at a place on a length of
road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is
permitted to stop at that place under these Rules.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Intersection
and parking control
sign are defined in the Dictionary, and pedestrian
crossing is defined in rule 81.
Note
2. A driver stops within a particular distance from a crossing if the
driver stops so any part of the driver’s vehicle is within that
distance—see rule 350 (2).
(2) For this rule, distances are measured:(a) in the direction in which the driver is driving,
and
(b) as shown in the example.
(3) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note. Road related
area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
Example.
Measurement of distance—pedestrian crossing  |
173 Stopping on or near a marked foot crossing (except at an
intersection)
(1) A driver must not stop on a marked foot crossing that is not at an
intersection, or on the road within 10 metres before the traffic lights pole
nearest to the driver at the crossing and 3 metres after the crossing, unless
the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a
parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place
under these Rules.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Intersection,
marked
foot crossing, parking control
sign and traffic lights
pole are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. A driver stops within a particular distance from a traffic lights
pole or a crossing if the driver stops so any part of the driver’s
vehicle is within that distance—see rule 350 (2).
(2) For this rule, distances are measured:(a) in the direction in which the driver is driving,
and
(b) as shown in the example.
(3) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note. Road related
area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
Example.
Measurement of distance—marked foot crossing  |
174 Stopping at or near bicycle crossing lights (except at an
intersection)
(1) This rule applies to a place on a road:(a) with bicycle crossing lights facing bicycle riders crossing the
road, and
(b) with traffic lights facing traffic travelling on the road,
and
(c) that is not at an intersection.
Note. Bicycle
crossing lights, intersection
and traffic
lights are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A driver must not stop within 10 metres before the traffic lights
nearest to the driver at the place, and 3 metres after the traffic lights,
unless the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to
which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at
that place under these Rules.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Parking control
sign is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. A driver stops within a particular distance from traffic lights if
the driver stops so any part of the driver’s vehicle is within that
distance—see rule 350 (2).
(3) For this rule, distances are measured:(a) in the direction in which the driver is driving,
and
(b) as shown in the example.
(4) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note. Road related
area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
Example.
Measurement of distance—bicycle crossing lights  |
175 Stopping on or near a level crossing
(1) A driver must not stop on a level crossing, or on a road within 20
metres before the nearest rail or track to the driver approaching the crossing
and 20 metres after the nearest rail or track to the driver leaving the
crossing, unless the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an
area, to which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to
stop at that place under these Rules.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Level
crossing is defined in rule 120, and parking control
sign is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. A driver stops within a particular distance from a level crossing
if the driver stops so any part of the driver’s vehicle is within that
distance—see rule 350 (2).
(2) For this rule, distances are measured as shown in the
example.
(3) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note. Road related
area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
Example.
Measurement of distance—level crossing  |
Division 4 Stopping on clearways and freeways and in
emergency stopping lanes
Note 1. Area, length of road, park and stop are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 165 provides defences to the prosecution of a driver for an
offence against a provision of this Division.
176 Stopping on a clearway
(1) A driver must not stop on a length of road to which a clearway
sign applies, unless subrule (2) or (3) applies to the
driver.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(1A) In subrule (1):road
does not include a road related area.
Note. Road related
area is defined in rule 13.
(2) The driver of a public bus or public minibus may stop on the
length of road if the driver is dropping off, or picking up,
passengers.Note
1. Public
bus is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. The term public
minibus is not a term that is used in this jurisdiction. The
reference to that term in this subrule is retained in order to preserve
uniformity with the Australian Road
Rules.
(3) The driver of a taxi may stop on the length of road if:(a) the driver is dropping off, or picking up, passengers,
and
(b) there is not another law of this jurisdiction prohibiting the
driver of a taxi from stopping on a length of road to which a clearway
sign applies.
Note. Taxi is defined in the
Dictionary.
(4) A clearway sign applies, for the days or times indicated on
the sign, to a length of road beginning at the sign and ending at the nearest
of the following:(a) a clearway sign on the road that indicates different days
or times,
(b) an end clearway sign on the road,
(c) the end of the road.
Clearway signs |

| 
|
End clearway signs |

| 
|
Note 1 for
diagrams. There are a number of other permitted versions of the clearway
sign—see the diagrams in Schedules 2 and 3.
Note 2 for
diagrams. Anything on these signs may be differently arranged—see rule
316 (4).
176–1 NSW rule: stopping next to clearway (no stopping)
line
(cf RRR, cl 82)
(1) A driver (other than an authorised driver) must not stop at the
side of a road marked with a clearway (no stopping) line unless it is in
accordance with a clearway sign applying to that length of
road.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Rule 176 sets out when a driver may stop on a length of road to
which a clearway sign applies.
(2) A clearway (no
stopping) line is a broken longitudinal yellow line marked:(a) on the top or side of the kerb of a road, or
(b) on the carriageway of a road adjacent to the kerb,
or
(c) if there is no kerb, along a lateral boundary of the
carriageway.
Note. Carriageway is
defined in the Dictionary.
(3) In this rule:authorised
driver means:
(a) the driver of a bus being used to provide a regular bus service at
a bus stop, or
(b) the driver of a taxi dropping off, or picking up, passengers,
or
(c) the driver of a postal vehicle engaged in the clearance of mail
from a public postbox.
Note
1. Bus,
postal
vehicle, public postbox,
regular bus
service and taxi are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note
2. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
177 Stopping on a freeway
(1) A driver must not stop on a freeway unless:(a) the driver stops in an emergency stopping lane,
or
(b) the driver’s vehicle is permitted to stop on the freeway
under another law of this jurisdiction.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Driver’s
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary, and emergency
stopping lane is defined in rule 95.
Note
2. Rule 178 sets out when a driver can stop in an emergency stopping
lane.
(1–1) This rule does not apply to:(a) the driver of a truck while stopped in a truck parking area,
or
(b) the driver of a public bus used to provide a public passenger
service, while stopped:(i) in a bus parking area, or
(ii) in a bus zone or at a bus stop to drop off or pick up passengers,
or
(c) the driver of a vehicle who is authorised to maintain facilities
in a bus parking area, while stopped in the bus parking area for that
purpose.
Note
1. Bus parking
area, public bus,
public
passenger service, truck and truck parking
area are defined in the Dictionary. Bus zone is
defined in rule 183 (2). Vehicle is defined
in rule 15.
Note
2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 177 of the Australian
Road Rules.
(2) A freeway is a length of
road to which a freeway sign applies.
(3) A freeway sign on a road applies to a length of road
beginning at the sign (including any road into which the length of road
merges) and ending at the next end freeway sign on the
road.
Freeway signs |

| 
|
End freeway sign |

|
Note for
diagrams. There are a number of other permitted versions of each of these
signs—see the diagrams in Schedule 3.
178 Stopping in an emergency stopping lane
A driver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not stop in an
emergency stopping lane unless:(a) the condition of the driver, a passenger or the driver’s
vehicle, or any other factor, makes it necessary or desirable for the driver
to stop in the emergency stopping lane in the interests of safety, and the
driver stops for no longer than is necessary in the circumstances,
or
(b) the driver is permitted to stop in the emergency stopping lane
under another law of this jurisdiction.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bicycle and driver’s
vehicle are defined in the Dictionary, and emergency stopping
lane is defined in rule 95.
Division 5 Stopping in zones for particular
vehicles
Note 1. Area, length of road, park and stop are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 165 provides defences to the prosecution of a driver for an
offence against a provision of this Division.
Note 3. The signs mentioned in this Division are particular types of
parking control
sign (defined in the Dictionary) to which the general rules about
the application of parking control signs apply—see rules 332 to
335.
179 Stopping in a loading zone
(1) A driver must not stop in a loading zone unless the driver is
driving:(a) a public bus that is dropping off, or picking up, passengers,
or
(b) a truck that is dropping off, or picking up, goods,
or
(c) any of the following vehicles:(i) a vehicle that a person is getting into or out of or getting on or
off,
(ii) a station wagon or a motor bike that has 3 wheels and is
constructed principally for the conveyance of goods,
(iii) a motor vehicle constructed principally for the conveyance of
goods (other than a vehicle referred to in subparagraph
(ii)).
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Public
bus and truck are defined in
the Dictionary.
Note
2. Subrule (1) (c) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in
rule 179 of the Australian Road
Rules. However, the corresponding paragraph in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of
this jurisdiction to permit a driver of specified vehicles to stop in a
loading zone. Different rules may apply in other Australian
jurisdictions.
(2) A driver who is permitted to stop in a loading zone must not stay
continuously in the zone for longer than:(a) 30 minutes, or
(b) if information on or with the loading zone signs applying
to the loading zone indicates another time—the indicated time,
or
(c) for a driver of a vehicle referred to in subrule (1) (c):(i) in the case of a vehicle that a person is getting into or out of
or getting on or off—the period during which the person is getting into
or out of, or on or off, the vehicle, or
(ii) in the case of a station wagon or a motor bike that has 3 wheels
and is constructed principally for the conveyance of goods—the period
during which goods are being dropped off or picked up from the vehicle or 15
minutes (whichever is the lesser), or
(iii) in the case of a motor vehicle constructed principally for the
conveyance of goods (other than a vehicle referred to in subparagraph
(ii))—the period during which goods are being dropped off or picked up
from the vehicle or 30 minutes (whichever is the
lesser).
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Motor
bike, motor vehicle,
station
wagon and with are defined in
the Dictionary.
Note
2. Subrule (2) (c) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in
rule 179 of the Australian Road
Rules. However, the corresponding paragraph in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of
this jurisdiction to specify the period during which the driver of a vehicle
permitted to stop in loading zones may stop in such zones. Different rules may
apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
(3) A loading
zone is a length of a road to which a loading zone sign
applies.
(3–1) This rule does not apply to a driver who stops a goods vehicle in
a ticket-operated loading zone.Note
1. Goods
vehicle and ticket-operated
loading zone are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 179–1 makes special provision for goods vehicles
stopping in ticket-operated loading zones.
Note
3. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 179 of the Australian
Road Rules.
Loading zone sign  |
Note 1 for
diagram. There is another permitted version of the loading zone
sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for
diagram. A loading zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a
different direction and anything on the sign may be differently
arranged—see rule 316 (4).
179–1 NSW rule: stopping in ticket-operated loading
zone
(cf RRR, cl 77)
(1) A driver must not stop a goods vehicle in a ticket-operated
loading zone unless a current loading zone ticket is displayed in a manner
that makes its date and expiry time clearly visible to persons outside the
vehicle:(a) in or on the front left-hand portion of the vehicle,
or
(b) if a different portion is specified in the ticket in relation to a
particular class of vehicles, in or on such portion of the vehicle as is so
specified.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Goods
vehicle and loading zone
ticket are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A ticket-operated
loading zone is a length of road to which a loading zone
sign applies where information on or with the sign includes the word
“TICKET”.Note. With is defined in
the Dictionary.
(3) A driver does not commit an offence under subrule (1) if the
driver:(a) stops a goods vehicle in a ticket-operated loading zone before
obtaining a loading zone ticket, so long as the person obtains and displays a
current loading zone ticket in accordance with this rule immediately after
stopping the vehicle, or
(b) is driving a vehicle that is actually engaged in dropping off, or
picking up, passengers.
(4) A driver must not display more than one loading zone ticket at any
one time in or on a goods vehicle that is stopped in a ticket-operated loading
zone.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(5) The driver of a goods vehicle must not allow the vehicle to remain
stopped in a ticket-operated loading zone after the expiry of the loading zone
ticket displayed in or on the vehicle.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(6) The driver of a goods vehicle must not replace a loading zone
ticket in or on the vehicle (whether or not either of the expiry times shown
on the ticket has been reached) with a fresh loading zone ticket for the
purpose of allowing the vehicle to remain stopped in the ticket-operated
loading zone after the expiry time specified in the first loading zone ticket
for the vehicle.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. A driver (along with other persons) may also commit offences under
clause 121A of the Road
Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999 if
he or she defaces or otherwise interferes with a loading zone ticket machine
or loading zone ticket.
(7) A driver must not stop in a ticket-operated loading zone that is
closed.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Clause 121B of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management)
Regulation 1999 enables the Authority to temporarily close a
ticket-operated loading zone by erecting a sign to that effect in, or in close
proximity to, the zone.
(8) This rule prevails over any other parking restrictions that apply
within a ticket-operated loading zone, and those restrictions do not apply,
and may not be enforced, in respect of a goods vehicle that is stopped in such
a zone in accordance with this rule.
Loading zone sign  |
Note 1 for
diagram. There is another permitted version of the loading zone
sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for
diagram. A loading zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a
different direction and anything on the sign may be differently
arranged—see rule 316 (4).
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
180 Stopping in a truck zone
(1) A driver must not stop in a truck zone unless the driver is
driving:(a) a truck that is dropping off, or picking up, goods,
or
(b) a motor vehicle that is dropping off, or picking up,
passengers.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Motor vehicle
and truck
are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Subrule (1) (b) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in
rule 180 of the Australian Road
Rules. However, the corresponding paragraph in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of
this jurisdiction to permit a driver of vehicle to stop in a truck zone.
Different rules may apply in other Australian
jurisdictions.
(2) A truck
zone is a length of a road to which a truck zone sign
applies.
Truck zone sign  |
Note for
diagram. A truck zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different
direction and anything on the sign may be differently arranged—see rule
316 (4).
181 Stopping in a works zone
(1) A driver must not stop in a works zone unless the driver is
driving a vehicle that is:(a) engaged in construction work in or near the zone,
or
(b) dropping off, or picking up,
passengers.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Subrule (1) (b) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in
rule 181 of the Australian Road
Rules. However, the corresponding paragraph in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of
this jurisdiction to permit the driver of a vehicle to stop in a works zone.
Different rules may apply in other Australian
jurisdictions.
(2) A works
zone is a length of a road to which a works zone sign
applies.
Works zone sign  |
Note 1 for
diagram. There is another permitted version of this sign—see the
diagram in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for
diagram. A works zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different
direction and anything on the sign may be differently arranged—see rule
316 (4).
182 Stopping in a taxi zone
(1) A driver must not stop in a taxi zone, unless the driver is
driving a taxi.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Taxi is defined in the
Dictionary.
(2) A taxi
zone is a length of a road to which a taxi zone sign
applies.
Taxi zone sign  |
Note 1 for
diagram. There is another permitted version of this sign—see the
diagram in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for
diagram. A taxi zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different
direction and anything on the sign may be differently arranged—see rule
316 (4).
183 Stopping in a bus zone
(1) A driver must not stop in a bus zone unless the driver is driving
a public bus (except a public bus of a kind that is not permitted to stop in
the bus zone by information on or with the bus zone sign applying to
the bus zone) that is:(a) dropping off, or picking up, passengers, or
(b) stopping for the purposes of a regular bus
service.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Public
bus, regular bus
service and with are defined in
the Dictionary.
Note
2. This subrule is not uniform with the corresponding subrule in rule
183 of the Australian Road Rules.
Different rules may apply in other Australian
jurisdictions.
(2) A bus
zone is a length of a road to which a bus zone sign
applies.
Bus zone sign  |
Note 1 for
diagram. There is another permitted version of the bus zone
sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
Note 2 for
diagram. A bus zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different
direction and anything on the sign may be differently arranged—see rule
316 (4).
184 Stopping in a minibus zone
(1) A driver (except the driver of a public minibus) must not stop in
a minibus zone.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Public
minibus is defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A minibus
zone is a length of road to which a minibus zone sign
applies.
Note. Minibus zones are not used in this jurisdiction because the term
public
minibus is not used in this jurisdiction. This rule is retained in
order to preserve uniformity with the Australian
Road Rules.
Minibus zone sign  |
Note for
diagram. A minibus zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a
different direction and anything on the sign may be differently
arranged—see rule 316 (4).
185 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
* * * * *Note. Rule 185 (Stopping in a permit zone) of the Australian Road Rules has not been
reproduced in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve
uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road
Rules.
186 Stopping in a mail zone
(1) A driver must not stop in a mail zone.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) A mail
zone is a length of a road to which a mail zone sign
applies.
Note. Exemptions for drivers of postal vehicles may be provided under
rule 313.
Mail zone sign  |
Note for
diagram. A mail zone sign may have an arrow pointing in a different
direction and anything on the sign may be differently arranged—see rule
316 (4).
Division 6 Other places where stopping is
restricted
Note 1. Area, length of road, park and stop are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 165 provides defences to the prosecution of a driver for an
offence against a provision of this Division.
187 Stopping in a bicycle lane, bus lane, tram lane, tramway,
transit lane, truck lane or on tram tracks
(1) A driver must not stop in a bus lane, transit lane or truck lane
unless the driver:(a) is driving a public bus, public minibus or taxi, and is dropping
off or picking up, passengers, and
(b) is permitted to drive in the lane under these Rules or another law
of this jurisdiction.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) A driver must not stop in a bicycle lane unless:(a) the driver:(i) is driving a public bus, public minibus or taxi, and is dropping
off or picking up, passengers, and
(ii) is permitted to drive in the lane under these Rules or another law
of this jurisdiction, or
(b) the driver is permitted to stop or park in the bicycle lane under
another law of this jurisdiction.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) A driver (except the driver of a tram, a tram recovery vehicle or
a public bus) must not stop in a tram lane, a tramway or on tram
tracks.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
Note
1. Bicycle
lane is defined in rule 153, bus lane is defined in
rule 154, tram
lane is defined in rule 155, tramway is defined in
rule 155A, transit
lane is defined in rule 156, truck lane is defined
in rule 157, and public
bus, taxi, tram and tram tracks are
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. The term public minibus is
not a term that is used in this jurisdiction. The reference to that term in
this rule is retained in order to preserve uniformity with the Australian Road
Rules.
Note
3. Rule 76 deals with drivers keeping clear of trams travelling in
tram lanes or on tram tracks marked on each side by a yellow
line.
Note
4. Part 11, Division 6 deals with driving in bicycle lanes, bus
lanes, tram lanes, tramways, transit lanes and truck
lanes.
188 Stopping in a shared zone
A driver must not stop in a shared zone unless:(a) the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to
which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at
that place under these Rules, or
(b) the driver stops in a parking bay and the driver is permitted to
stop in the parking bay under these Rules, or
(c) the driver is dropping off, or picking up, passengers or goods,
or
(d) the driver is engaged in the door-to-door delivery or collection
of goods, or in the collection of waste or garbage.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Parking
bay and parking control
sign are defined in the Dictionary, and shared zone is defined
in rule 24.
189 Double parking
(1) A driver must not stop on a road if to do so would put any part of
the vehicle that he or she is driving between a vehicle that is parked on the
road and the centre of the road.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. One-way road and
two-way
road are defined in the Dictionary.
Examples.
Example 1 Double parked on a two-way road without a dividing
line  | Example 2 Double parked on two-way road with a centre dividing
line  |
Example 3 Double parked on the right side of a one-way road with
no vehicles parked on the left side of the road  | Example 4 Double parked on the left side of a one-way road with
other vehicles lawfully parked on the right side of the road  |
In the examples, the vehicle marked with an “X” is
stopped in contravention of this rule.
(2) A driver does not contravene this rule by parking on the side of
the road, or in a median strip parking area, in accordance with rule
210.Note. Median strip
parking area is defined in the Dictionary.
Example. In the example, the angle-parked vehicles are not stopped in
contravention of this rule.
190 Stopping in or near a safety zone
(1) A driver must not stop in a safety zone, or on a road within 10
metres before or after a safety zone, unless the driver stops at a place on a
length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign applies and the
driver is permitted to stop at that place under these Rules.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Parking control
sign is defined in the Dictionary, and safety zone is
defined in rule 162.
Note
2. A driver stops within a particular distance before or after
something if the driver stops so any part of the vehicle is within that
distance—see rule 350 (2).
(2) For this rule, distances are measured:(a) in the direction in which the driver is driving,
and
(b) from the end of the structure, and
(c) as shown in the example.
(3) In this rule:road
does not include a road-related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note. Road related
area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
Safety zone sign  |
Example.
Measurement of distance—safety zone  |
In the example, the vehicles marked with an “X” are
stopped in contravention of this rule.
191 Stopping near an obstruction
A driver must not stop on a road near an obstruction on the road
in a position that obstructs traffic on the road.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Obstruction is
defined in the Dictionary.
192 Stopping on a bridge or in a tunnel etc
(1) A driver must not stop on a bridge, causeway, ramp or similar
structure unless:(a) the road is at least as wide on the structure as it is on each of
the approaches, or
(b) the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to
which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at
that place under these Rules.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Parking control
sign is defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A driver must not stop in a tunnel or underpass unless:(a) the road is at least as wide in the tunnel or underpass as it is
on each of the approaches, or
(b) the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to
which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at
that place under these Rules.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
Example.
Stopping on a bridge where the road on the bridge is narrower than on
an approach  |
In the example, the vehicle is stopped in contravention of subrule
(1).
193 Stopping on a crest or curve outside a built-up
area
(1) A driver must not stop on or near a crest or curve on a length of
road that is not in a built-up area unless:(a) the driver’s vehicle is visible for 100 metres to drivers
approaching the vehicle and travelling in the direction of travel of traffic
on the same side of the road as the vehicle, or
(b) the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to
which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at
that place under these Rules.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Built-up area,
driver’s
vehicle and parking control
sign are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note. Road related
area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
194 Stopping near a fire hydrant etc
(1) A driver must not stop within 1 metre of a fire hydrant, fire
hydrant indicator, or fire plug indicator, unless:(a) the driver is driving a public bus, and the driver stops at a bus
stop or in a bus zone and does not leave the bus unattended,
or
(b) the driver is driving a taxi, and the driver stops in a taxi zone
and does not leave the taxi unattended, or
(c) the driver is driving a public minibus, and the driver stops in a
minibus zone and does not leave the minibus
unattended.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Bus
zone is defined in rule 183, public bus and
taxi are
defined in the Dictionary, minibus zone is
defined in rule 184, and taxi zone is
defined in rule 182.
Note
2. Neither minibus zones
nor the term public
minibus are used in this jurisdiction. The references to those terms
in this subrule are retained in order to preserve uniformity with the Australian Road
Rules.
(2) For this rule, a driver leaves a vehicle unattended if the
driver leaves the vehicle so the driver is over 3 metres from the closest
point of the vehicle.
(3) In this rule:fire
hydrant means an upright pipe with a spout, nozzle or other outlet
for drawing water from a main or service pipe in case of fire or other
emergency.
Examples.
Fire hydrant
indicators |

| 
|
Fire plug indicator |

|
195 Stopping at or near a bus stop
(1) A driver (except the driver of a public bus) must not stop at a
bus stop, or on the road, within 20 metres before a sign on the road that
indicates the bus stop, and 10 metres after the sign, unless the driver stops
at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a parking control sign
applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these
Rules.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Parking control
sign and public bus are
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. A driver stops within a particular distance before or after a sign
indicating a bus stop if the driver stops so any part of the driver’s
vehicle is within that distance—see rule 350 (2).
(1–1) A driver of a public bus must not stop at a bus stop, or on the
road, within 20 metres before a sign on the road that indicates the bus stop,
and 10 metres after the sign, unless the driver:(a) is dropping off, or picking up, passengers, or
(b) is stopping for the purposes of a regular bus service,
or
(c) stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a
parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place
under these Rules.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Parking control
sign, public bus and
regular
bus service are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 195 of the Australian
Road Rules.
(2) For this rule, distances are measured in the direction in which
the driver is driving.
(3) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note. Road related
area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
196 Stopping at or near a tram stop
(1) A driver (except the driver of a tram, a tram recovery vehicle or
a public bus travelling along tram tracks) must not stop at a tram stop or on
the road within 20 metres before a sign that indicates a tram stop,
unless:(a) the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to
which a parking control sign applies, and
(b) the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these
Rules.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Parking control
sign, public bus,
tram and
travelling
along tram tracks are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note
2. A driver stops within a particular distance before a sign
indicating a tram stop if the driver stops so any part of the driver’s
vehicle is within that distance—see rule 350 (2).
(2) For this rule, the distance is measured in the direction in which
the driver is driving.
(3) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note. Road related
area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
197 Stopping on a path, dividing strip, nature strip or
painted island
(1) A driver must not stop on a bicycle path, footpath, shared path or
dividing strip, or a nature strip adjacent to a length of road in a built-up
area, unless:(a) the driver stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to
which a parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at
that place under these Rules, or
(b) the driver is permitted to stop under another law of this
jurisdiction.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Bicycle path is
defined in rule 239, built-up area,
dividing
strip, footpath, nature strip
and parking control
sign are defined in the Dictionary, and shared path is
defined in rule 242.
Note
2. A separated
footpath is a particular kind of footpath—see rule
239.
(1A) A driver must not stop on a painted island.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Painted
island is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 85 deals with the give way rules applying to a driver
entering a turning lane from a painted island and rule 138 deals with keeping
off painted islands.
(2) Subrule (1) does not apply to the rider of a bicycle or
animal.Note. Bicycle is defined
in the Dictionary.
198 Obstructing access to and from a footpath, driveway
etc
(1) A driver must not stop on a road in a position that obstructs
access by vehicles or pedestrians to or from a footpath ramp or a similar way
of access to a footpath, or a bicycle path or passageway unless:(a) the driver is driving a public bus that is dropping off, or
picking up, passengers, or
(b) the driver stops in a parking bay and the driver is permitted to
stop in the parking bay under these Rules.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bicycle path is
defined in rule 239, and footpath, parking bay and
public
bus are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A driver must not stop on or across a driveway or other way of
access for vehicles travelling to or from adjacent land unless:(a) the driver:(i) is dropping off, or picking up, passengers,
and
(ii) does not leave the vehicle unattended, and
(iii) completes the dropping off, or picking up, of the passengers, and
drives on, as soon as possible and, in any case, within 2 minutes after
stopping, or
(b) the driver stops in a parking bay and the driver is permitted to
stop in the parking bay under these Rules.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Adjacent land
is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. A driver stops on or across a driveway or way of access if any
part of the vehicle is on or across the driveway or way of access—see
rule 350.
Example.
Blocking a driveway  |
In the example, the vehicle marked with an “X” is
stopped in contravention of subrule (2).
(3) For this rule, a driver leaves a vehicle unattended if the
driver leaves the vehicle so that the driver is over 3 metres from the closest
point of the vehicle.
199 Stopping near a postbox
(1) A driver must not stop on a road within 3 metres of a public
postbox, unless the driver:(a) is dropping off, or picking up, passengers or mail,
or
(b) stops at a place on a length of road, or in an area, to which a
parking control sign applies and the driver is permitted to stop at that place
under these Rules.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Parking control
sign and public
postbox are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 199 (2) of the Australian Road
Rules, which contains a definition of public
postbox, has not been reproduced in these Rules. The definition in
the Australian Road Rules allows
the term to be defined in another law of this jurisdiction. Accordingly, a
definition of the term is set out in the Dictionary.
200 Stopping on roads—heavy and long
vehicles
(1) The driver of a heavy vehicle, or long vehicle, must not stop on a
length of road that is not in a built-up area, except on the shoulder of the
road.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Built-up area
is defined in the Dictionary, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
(2) The driver of a heavy vehicle, or long vehicle, must not stop on a
length of road in a built-up area for longer than 1 hour, unless the driver is
permitted to stop on the length of road for longer than 1 hour by information
on or with a traffic control device, or under subrule (2A), (2A–1) or
(2A–2).Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Traffic control
device and with are defined in
the Dictionary.
Note
2. Subrule (2) is not uniform with the corresponding subrule in rule
200 of the Australian Road Rules.
However, the corresponding subrule in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of
this jurisdiction to permit a driver of a heavy vehicle or long vehicle to
stop on a length of road in a built-up area for longer than 1 hour. Different
rules may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
(2A) The driver of a heavy vehicle, or long vehicle, other than a bus,
is permitted to stop on a length of road in a built up area for longer than 1
hour if, throughout the period when the vehicle is stopped on the length of
road, the driver is engaged in dropping off, or picking up,
goods.
(2A–1) The driver of a heavy vehicle, or a long vehicle, is permitted to
stop on a length of road in a built-up area for longer than 1 hour if:(a) the driver is carrying out functions under the road transport
legislation, or
(b) the driver is complying with a direction given by a police officer
or other person carrying out functions under the road transport legislation,
or
(c) the heavy vehicle or long vehicle is a
bus.
Note
1. Bus and road
transport legislation are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note
2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 200 of the Australian
Road Rules.
(2A–2) The driver of a heavy vehicle, or a long vehicle, is permitted to
stop on a length of road in a built-up area for longer than 1 hour if the
vehicle is stopped for a purpose that is ancillary to or connected with the
lawful carrying out of a filming project (within the meaning of the Local Government Act 1993) that is
approved under that Act.Note. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 200 of the Australian
Road Rules.
(3) In this rule:heavy
vehicle means a vehicle with a GVM of 4.5 tonnes or
more.
long
vehicle means a vehicle that, together with any load or projection,
is 7.5 metres long, or longer.
road
does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note
1. GVM is defined in the
Act, road
related area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
Note
2. Vehicle includes a
combination—see rule 15 (d).
201 Stopping on a road with bicycle parking sign
A driver (except the rider of a bicycle) must not stop on a length
of road to which a bicycle parking sign applies, unless the driver is
dropping off, or picking up, passengers.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bicycle is defined in the
Dictionary.
Bicycle parking sign  |
Note for
diagram. Anything on this sign may be differently arranged—see rule
316 (4).
202 Stopping on a road with motor bike parking
sign
A driver (except the rider of a motor bike) must not stop on a
length of road to which a motor bike parking sign applies, unless the
driver is dropping off, or picking up, passengers.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Motor
bike is defined in the Dictionary.
Motor bike parking sign  |
Note for
diagram. Anything on this sign may be differently arranged—see rule
316 (4).
203 Stopping in a parking area for people with
disabilities
(1) A driver must not stop in a parking area for people with
disabilities unless:(a) the driver’s vehicle displays a current parking permit for
people with disabilities, and
(b) the driver complies with the conditions of use of the
permit.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Driver’s
vehicle and parking
permit for people with disabilities are defined in the
Dictionary.
(2) A parking
area for people with disabilities is a length or area of a
road:(a) to which a permissive parking sign displaying a people with
disabilities symbol applies, or
(b) to which a people with disabilities parking sign applies,
or
(c) indicated by a road marking (a people
with disabilities road marking) that consists of, or includes, a
people with disabilities symbol.
People with disabilities
symbols |

| 
|
Permissive parking sign displaying a people with disabilities
symbol (for a length of road)  | Permissive parking sign displaying a people with disabilities
symbol (for an area)  |
People with disabilities parking sign  |
Note for
diagrams. Anything on these signs may be differently arranged—see rule
316 (4).
203A Stopping in a slip lane
A driver must not stop in a slip lane unless:(a) a parking control sign applies to the place where the driver
stops, and
(b) the driver is permitted to stop at that place under these
Rules.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Parking control
sign and slip
lane are defined in the Dictionary.
Division 7 Permissive parking signs and parking
fees
Note 1. Area, length of road, park and stop are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 165 provides defences to the prosecution of a driver for an
offence against a provision of this Division.
204 Meaning of certain information on or with permissive
parking signs
(1) This rule explains the meaning of certain information on or with a
permissive parking sign applying to a length of road or an
area.Note. With is defined in the
Dictionary.
Permissive parking sign (for a length of road)  | Permissive parking sign (for an area)  |
Permissive parking sign (for a length of road)  |
Note 1
for diagrams. There is another permitted version of a permissive parking
sign—see the diagram in Schedule 3.
Note 2
for diagrams. A permissive parking sign may have an arrow pointing in a
different direction and anything on the sign may be differently
arranged—see rule 316 (4).
Note. Rule 318 (1) and (2) deal with the effect of information on or
with a traffic control device (including a permissive parking sign)
that limits the application of the device to particular times or days. Under
rule 318 (3), if the information indicates that the device applies on a
particular day, for example Friday, the sign does not have effect on a Friday
that is a public holiday unless otherwise stated.
(2) A whole number, fraction, or whole number and fraction,
immediately to the left of the letter “P” indicates that a driver
must not park on the length of road, or in the area, continuously for longer
than the period of hours, or fraction of an hour, equal to the number,
fraction, or number and fraction, shown.Examples of
permissive parking signs showing permitted parking periods and times of
operation.
Example 1 Permissive parking sign applying to a length of road with a whole
number to the left of P  | Example 2 Permissive parking sign applying to an area with a whole number to
the left of P  |
In example 1, the sign indicates that a driver must not park
continuously for longer than 1 hour on Saturdays between 9 am and 12
noon.
In example 2, the sign indicates that a driver must not park in
the area for longer than 2 hours on Mondays to Fridays between 8.30 am and 5
pm, and on Saturdays between 8.30 am and 12 noon, unless permitted by
information on or with another traffic control device.
(3) A number, together with the word “minute”, immediately
to the right of the letter “P” indicate that a driver must not
park on the length of road, or in the area, continuously for longer than the
number of minutes shown.Example.
Example 3 Permissive parking sign with a number of minutes to the right of
P  |
In this example, the sign indicates that a driver must not park
continuously for longer than 5 minutes on Mondays to Fridays between 9 am and
4 pm.
(4) The word “parking”, together with words indicating a
number of hours or minutes, indicate that a driver must not park on the length
of road, or in the area, continuously for longer than the number of hours or
minutes shown.
205 Parking for longer than indicated
(1) A driver must not park continuously on a length of road, or in an
area, to which a permissive parking sign applies for longer than the
period indicated by information on or with the sign or, if rule 206 applies to
the driver, the period allowed under that rule.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. With is defined in the
Dictionary.
(1A) If a permissive parking sign does not indicate a period and
does not indicate that it applies at particular times, or at particular times
on particular days, a driver may, at any time, park continuously on a length
of road, or in an area, to which the sign applies, unless:(a) another parking control sign applies to the length of road or
area, and
(b) the driver is prohibited from parking on the length of road, or in
the area, under these Rules.
Note. Parking control
sign is defined in the Dictionary.
(2) For subrule (1), a driver parks continuously on a length of road,
or in an area, to which a permissive parking sign applies, from the
time when the driver parks on the length of road, or in the area, until the
driver, or another driver, moves the vehicle off the length of road, or out of
the area, to which the permissive parking sign
applies.
205A Parking outside times indicated
If a permissive parking sign indicates that it applies at
particular times, or at particular times on particular days, a driver may park
on the length of road, or in an area, to which the sign applies at a time, or
at a time on a day, when the sign does not apply, unless:(a) another parking control sign applies to the length of road or
area, and
(b) the driver is prohibited from parking on the length of road, or in
the area, at that time, or at that time on that day, under these
Rules.
Note
1. Parking control
sign is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 318 (1) and (2) deal with the effect of information on or
with a traffic control device (including a permissive parking sign)
that limits the application of the device to particular times or days. Under
rule 318 (3), if the information indicates that the device applies on a
particular day, for example Friday, the sign does not have effect on a Friday
that is a public holiday at the place where the device is located, unless
otherwise stated.
205A–1 NSW rule: parking in special event parking
areas
(cf RRR, cl 79)
(1) A driver must not park continuously in a special event parking
area for longer than the period indicated by information on or with the
special event parking area signs for the area.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. With is defined in
the Dictionary.
(2) A special event
parking area is the network of roads in an area with:(a) a special event parking area sign on each road into the
area, and
(b) an end special event parking area sign on each road out of
the area.
(3) A whole number, fraction, or whole number and fraction,
immediately to the left of the letter “P” on a special event
parking area sign indicates that a driver must not park in the area
continuously for longer than the period of hours, or fraction of an hour,
equal to the number, fraction, or number and fraction, shown.Note. Rule 318 (1) and (2) deal with the effect of information on or
with a traffic control device (including a special event parking area
sign) that limits the application of the device to particular times or
days. Under rule 318 (3), if the information indicates that the device applies
on a particular day, for example Friday, the sign does not have effect on a
Friday that is a public holiday unless otherwise stated.
(4) In subrule (2) (a) and (b):road does not include a
road related area.
(5) Subrule (1) does not apply to the driver of a vehicle in any of
the following circumstances:(a) if the vehicle is a public utility service
vehicle,
(b) if the vehicle:(i) is the subject of a current special event parking permit,
and
(ii) is parked in accordance with the terms of the permit,
and
(iii) in the case of a printed parking permit—is displaying the
permit,
(c) if the vehicle is actually dropping off or picking up passengers
or goods.
Note. Printed
parking permit and public
utility service vehicle are defined in the
Dictionary.
(6) This rule does not affect any other parking restrictions that
apply within a special event parking area, and those restrictions continue to
apply, and may be enforced, accordingly.
(7) In this rule:driver does not include
the rider of a bicycle or an animal.
special event
parking permit means a permit of the kind referred to in clause 124
(2) (e) of the Road
Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation
1999.
Special event parking area sign  | End special event parking area sign  |
Note for
diagrams. A special event parking area sign or end special event
parking sign may have a different number on the sign—see rule 316
(4).
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
206 Time extension for people with disabilities
(1) This rule applies to a driver if:(a) the driver’s vehicle displays a current parking permit for
people with disabilities, and
(a–1) in the case of a permit that is a mobility parking scheme
authority—the driver’s vehicle is being used for:(a) the conveyance of the disabled person to whom the authority was
issued, or
(b) the conveyance of disabled persons by the organisation to which
the authority was issued, and
(b) the driver complies with the conditions of use of the
permit.
Note
1. Disabled
person, driver’s
vehicle, mobility
parking scheme authority and parking
permit for people with disabilities are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note
2. Paragraph (a–1) is an additional NSW paragraph. There is no
corresponding paragraph in rule 206 of the Australian Road
Rules.
Note
3. Division 2 of Part 6 of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management)
Regulation 1999 provides for the issue of, and conditions of
use for, mobility parking scheme authorities.
(2) The driver may park continuously on a length of road, or in an
area, to which a permissive parking sign applies (except in a parking
area for people with disabilities) for:(a) twice the period indicated on the sign, or
(b) if the permit displayed on the driver’s vehicle is a
mobility parking scheme authority:(i) 30 minutes, if the maximum period indicated on the sign is less
than 30 minutes, or
(ii) 2 hours, if the maximum period indicated on the sign is 30
minutes, or
(iii) an unlimited period of time, if the maximum period indicated on
the sign is more than 30 minutes.
Note
1. Parking
area for people with disabilities is defined in rule
203.
Note
2. Subrule (2) is not uniform with the corresponding subrule in rule
206 of the Australian Road Rules.
Different rules may apply in other Australian
jurisdictions.
(2–1) This rule applies to a disabled person to whom an interstate or
overseas authority has been issued in the same way as it applies to a person
to whom a mobility parking scheme authority has been
issued.
(2–2) In this rule:interstate
or overseas authority has the same meaning as in Division 2 of Part
6 of the Road Transport
(Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation
1999.
Note. Subrules (2–1) and (2–2) are additional NSW subrules.
There are no corresponding subrules in rule 206 of the Australian Road
Rules.
207 Parking where fees are payable
(1) This rule applies to a driver who parks on a length of road, or in
an area, to which a permissive parking sign applies if information on
or with the sign indicates that a fee is payable for parking by buying a
ticket or putting money into a parking meter.Note. With is defined in the
dictionary.
(2) The driver must:(a) pay the fee (if any) payable under the law of this jurisdiction,
and
(b) obey any instructions on or with the sign, meter, ticket or
ticket-vending machine.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2–1) Subrule (2) does not apply to:(a) the driver of a vehicle displaying a mobility parking scheme
authority if:(i) the authority is in force, and
(ii) the conditions of the authority are complied with,
and
(iii) the vehicle is parked in accordance with rule 206,
or
(b) a driver parking in a pay parking area.
Note
1. Mobility
parking scheme authority and pay parking
area are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Part 4 of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management)
Regulation 1999 makes provision for the administration of pay
parking schemes (including the designation of pay parking areas and the fixing
of fees by parking authorities).
Note
3. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 207 of the Australian
Road Rules. Rules 207–1 to 207–9 make provision
for parking in pay parking areas.
207–1 NSW rule: parking in metered parking
areas
(cf RRR, cl 61)
(1) A driver must not park in a metered parking area unless the
driver’s vehicle is parked in a metered parking space.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Driver’s
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A metered parking
area is a parking area designated by one or more permissible
parking signs where information on or with the sign or signs includes the
word “METER”.Note. Parking area
and with are
defined in the Dictionary.
(3) A metered parking
space is a parking bay in a metered parking area that is indicated
by:(a) studs, pads, plates or strips, and
(b) in the case of a space controlled by a multi-space parking
meter— the number for the space and an arrow in or adjacent to the space
indicating the direction of the meter.
Note. Parking bay is
defined in the Dictionary.
(4) A driver must not park in a metered parking space without paying
the relevant parking fee for the space for at least the minimum period of time
for which parking in the space must be paid for.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Relevant parking
fee is defined in the Dictionary.
(5) A driver does not contravene subrule (4) if:(a) the driver parks in a metered parking space before paying the
relevant parking fee, so long as the person pays the fee immediately after
parking, or
(b) when the driver parks in a metered parking space, the parking
meter for the metered parking space is displaying unexpired
time.
Note. Parking
meter is defined in the Dictionary.
(6) A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain
parked in a metered parking space if the parking meter for the space indicates
that the period of time for which parking in the space has been paid for has
expired.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(7) A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain
parked in a metered parking space for more than the period of time indicated
on or with the permissive parking sign or signs that designate the
space as the maximum time for which a vehicle may be parked in the
space.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(8) A driver who parks in a metered parking space does not contravene
this rule if:(a) the space is within another kind of pay parking area and the
driver complies with these Rules in relation to parking in the kind of pay
parking area concerned, or
(b) the driver parks for a period not exceeding the period (if any)
for which no fee is payable for parking in the space, or
(c) the driver parks outside the controlled parking hours for the
space, or
(d) the driver’s vehicle is displaying a current mobility
parking scheme authority, or
(e) the driver’s vehicle is displaying a current printed parking
permit while it is parked in the space and the space is located on a length of
road or in an area specified in the permit and the space is designated for use
by the holder of the permit, or
(f) an electronic parking permit is currently in force with respect to
the driver’s vehicle while it is parked in the space and the space is
located on a length of road or in an area specified in the permit and the
space is designated for use by the holder of the
permit.
Note. Controlled
parking hours, electronic
parking permit, mobility
parking scheme authority, pay parking
area and printed parking
permit are defined in the Dictionary.
(9) A driver who parks in a metered parking space does not contravene
this rule if the parking meter for the space is inoperable (except if the
driver parks in contravention of subrule (7)).
(10) In this rule:multi-space
parking meter means a parking meter that applies to more than one
metered parking space.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
207–2 NSW rule: parking in metered parking
spaces
(cf RRR, cl 62)
A driver must not park in a metered parking space:(a) while any other vehicle is parked in the space,
or
(b) in such a manner that any part of the vehicle lies over the
markings for the space.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Metered parking
space is defined in rule 207–1.
Note
2. A driver (along with other persons) may also commit offences under
clauses 100 and 100A of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management)
Regulation 1999 if he or she misuses or damages a parking
meter.
Note
3. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
207–3 NSW rule: parking in ticket parking
areas
(cf RRR, cl 66)
(1) A driver must not park in a ticket parking area unless a current
parking ticket is displayed, in such a manner that its date and expiry time
are clearly visible to persons outside the driver’s vehicle:(a) in or on the front left-hand portion of the vehicle,
or
(b) if a different portion is specified in the ticket in relation to a
particular class of vehicles—in or on such portion of the vehicle as is
so specified.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Driver’s
vehicle and parking
ticket are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A ticket parking
area is a parking area designated by one or more permissible
parking signs where information on or with the sign or signs includes the
word “TICKET”, but does not include any part of the parking area
in which the parking of vehicles is prohibited by another provision of these
Rules.Note. Parking area
and with are
defined in the Dictionary.
(3) A driver does not contravene subrule (1) if the driver parks in a
ticket parking area before obtaining a parking ticket, so long as the driver
obtains and displays a current parking ticket in accordance with this rule
immediately after parking the driver’s
vehicle.
(4) A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain
parked in a ticket parking area after the expiry of the parking ticket
displayed in or on the vehicle.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(5) A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain
parked in a ticket parking area for more than the period of time indicated on
or with the permissive parking signs that designate the area as the
maximum time for which a vehicle may be parked in the area.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(6) A driver who parks in a ticket parking area does not contravene
this rule if:(a) the area is, or forms part of, another kind of pay parking area
and the driver complies with these Rules in relation to parking in the kind of
pay parking area concerned, or
(b) the driver parks for a period not exceeding the period (if any)
for which no fee is payable for parking in the area, or
(c) the driver parks outside the controlled parking hours for the
area, or
(d) the driver’s vehicle is displaying a current mobility
parking scheme authority, or
(e) the driver’s vehicle is displaying a current printed parking
permit while it is parked in the area and the area is located on a length of
road specified in the permit and the area is designated for use by the holder
of the permit, or
(f) an electronic parking permit is currently in force with respect to
the driver’s vehicle while it is parked in the area and the area is
located on a length of road specified in the permit and the area is designated
for use by the holder of the permit.
Note. Controlled
parking hours, electronic
parking permit, mobility
parking scheme authority, pay parking
area and printed parking
permit are defined in the Dictionary.
(7) Nothing in this rule prevents a driver from parking in different
parts of the same ticket parking area while displaying the same parking
ticket.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
207–4 NSW rule: parking in ticket parking
spaces
(cf RRR, cl 67)
(1) A driver must not park in any ticket parking space:(a) while any other vehicle is parked in the space,
or
(b) in such a manner that any part of the vehicle lies over the
markings for the space.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. A driver (along with other persons) may also commit offences under
clauses 102 and 103 of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management)
Regulation 1999 if he or she misuses or damages a parking
ticket or ticket machine.
(2) A ticket parking
space is a parking bay in a ticket parking area that is indicated by
studs, pads, plates or strips.
Note
1. Parking
bay is defined in the Dictionary, and ticket parking
area is defined in rule 207–3.
Note
2. Most ticket parking areas do not have specially designated ticket
parking spaces.
Note
3. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
207–5 NSW rule: parking in coupon parking
areas
(cf RRR, cl 71)
(1) A driver must not park in a coupon parking area unless a current
parking coupon is displayed, in such a manner that its date and expiry time
are clearly visible to persons outside the driver’s vehicle:(a) in or on the front left-hand portion of the vehicle,
or
(b) if a different portion is specified in the coupon in relation to a
particular class of vehicles—in or on such portion of the vehicle as is
so specified.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Driver’s
vehicle and parking
coupon are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A coupon parking
area is a parking area designated by one or more permissible
parking signs where information on or with the sign or signs includes the
word “COUPON”, but does not include any part of the parking area
in which the parking of vehicles is prohibited by another provision of these
Rules.Note. Parking area
and with are
defined in the Dictionary.
(3) A driver does not contravene subrule (1) if the driver parks in a
coupon parking area before obtaining a parking coupon, so long as the driver
obtains and displays a current parking coupon in accordance with this rule
immediately after parking the driver’s
vehicle.
(4) A driver must not display more than 3 parking coupons at any one
time in or on the driver’s vehicle when it is parked in a coupon parking
area.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(5) A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain
parked in a coupon parking area after the expiry of the parking coupons
displayed in or on the vehicle.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(6) A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain
parked in a coupon parking area for more than the period of time indicated on
or with the permissive parking signs that designate the area as the
maximum time for which a vehicle may be parked in the area.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(7) A driver who parks in a coupon parking area does not contravene
this rule if:(a) the area is, or forms part of, another kind of pay parking area
and the driver complies with these Rules in relation to parking in the kind of
pay parking area concerned, or
(b) the driver parks for a period not exceeding the period (if any)
for which a coupon is not required for parking in the area,
or
(c) the driver parks outside the controlled parking hours for the
area, or
(d) the driver’s vehicle is displaying a current mobility
parking scheme authority, or
(e) the driver’s vehicle is displaying a current printed parking
permit while it is parked in the area and the area is located on a length of
road specified in the permit and the area is designated for use by the holder
of the permit, or
(f) an electronic parking permit is currently in force with respect to
the driver’s vehicle while it is parked in the area and the area is
located on a length of road specified in the permit and the area is designated
for use by the holder of the permit.
Note. Controlled
parking hours, electronic
parking permit, mobility
parking scheme authority, pay parking
area and printed parking
permit are defined in the Dictionary.
(8) Nothing in this rule prevents a driver from parking in different
parts of the same coupon parking area while displaying the same parking
coupon.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
207–6 NSW rule: parking in coupon parking
spaces
(cf RRR, cl 72)
(1) A driver must not park in any coupon parking space:(a) while any other vehicle is parked in the space,
or
(b) in such a manner that any part of the vehicle lies over the
markings for the space.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. A driver (along with other persons) may also commit offences under
clause 108 of the Road
Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999 if
he or she misuses or damages a parking coupon.
(2) A coupon parking
space is a parking bay in a coupon parking area that is indicated by
studs, pads, plates or strips.
Note
1. Parking
bay is defined in the Dictionary, and coupon parking
area is defined in rule 207–5.
Note
2. Most coupon parking areas do not have specially designated coupon
parking spaces.
Note
3. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
207–7 NSW rule: parking in temporarily closed pay
parking areas and spaces
(cf RRR, cll 63, 68 and 73)
A driver must not park in a pay parking area or a pay parking
space that is closed under the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management)
Regulation 1999.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Pay
parking area and pay parking
space are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Clauses 100B, 103A , 109 and 111C of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management)
Regulation 1999 enable parking authorities to temporarily
close pay parking areas or spaces that have been designated by such
authorities by erecting signs to that effect in, or in close proximity to, the
areas or spaces concerned.
207–8 NSW rule: parking in phone parking
areas
(1) A driver must not park in a phone parking area without paying the
relevant parking fee for the area:(a) for at least the minimum period of time for which parking in the
area must be paid for, and
(b) using a phone payment scheme (within the meaning of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic
Management) Regulation 1999).
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Relevant parking
fee is defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A phone parking
area is a parking area designated by one or more permissible
parking signs where information on or with the sign or signs includes the
phrase “PHONE”, but does not include any part of the parking area
in which the parking of vehicles is prohibited by another provision of these
Rules.Note. Parking area
and with are
defined in the Dictionary.
(3) A driver does not contravene subrule (1) if the driver parks in a
phone parking area before paying the relevant parking fee, so long as the
person pays the fee using a phone payment scheme immediately after
parking.
(4) A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain
parked in a phone parking area if the period for which the driver has paid to
park in the area using a phone payment scheme has expired.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Driver’s
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
(5) A driver must not allow the driver’s vehicle to remain
parked in a phone parking area for more than the period of time indicated on
or with the permissive parking signs that designate the area as the
maximum time for which a vehicle may be parked in the area.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(6) A driver who parks in a phone parking area does not contravene
this rule if:(a) the area is, or forms part of, another kind of pay parking area
and the driver complies with these Rules in relation to parking in the kind of
pay parking area concerned, or
(b) the driver parks for a period not exceeding the period (if any)
for which no fee is payable for parking in the area, or
(c) the driver parks outside the controlled parking hours for the
area, or
(d) the driver’s vehicle is displaying a current mobility
parking scheme authority, or
(e) the driver’s vehicle is displaying a current parking permit
while it is parked in the area and the area is located on a length of road
specified in the permit and the area is designated for use by the holder of
the permit.
Note
1. Controlled
parking hours, mobility
parking scheme authority, parking
permit and pay parking
area are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
207–9 NSW rule: parking in phone parking
spaces
(1) A driver must not park in any phone parking space:(a) while any other vehicle is parked in the space,
or
(b) in such a manner that any part of the vehicle lies over the
markings for the space.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) A phone parking
space is a parking bay in a phone parking area that is indicated by
studs, pads, plates or strips.Note
1. Parking bay is
defined in the Dictionary, and phone parking
area is defined in rule 207–8.
Note
2. Most phone parking areas do not have specially designated phone
parking spaces.
Note
3. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
Division 8 Parallel parking
Note 1. Area, length of road, park and stop are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 165 provides defences to the prosecution of a driver for an
offence against a provision of this Division.
208 Parallel parking on a road (except in a median strip
parking area)
(1) A driver who parks on a road (except in a median strip parking
area) must position the driver’s vehicle in accordance with subrules (2)
to (8).Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Driver’s
vehicle and median strip
parking area are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) The driver must position the vehicle to face:(a) in the direction of travel of vehicles in the marked lane or line
of traffic on, or next to, the part of the road where the driver parks,
or
(b) if there is no traffic on, or next to, that part of the
road—in the direction in which vehicles could lawfully travel on that
part of the road.
Note. Marked lane is
defined in the Dictionary.
(3) If the road is a two-way road, the driver must position the
vehicle parallel, and as near as practicable, to the far left side of the
road.Note. Two-way road is
defined in the Dictionary.
(4) If the road is a one-way road, the driver must position the
vehicle parallel, and as near as practicable, to the far left or far right
side of the road, unless otherwise indicated by information on or with a
parking control sign.Note. One-way road,
parking
control sign and with are defined in
the Dictionary.
(5) If the driver does not park in a parking bay, the driver must
position the vehicle at least 1 metre from the closest point of any vehicle in
front of it and any vehicle behind it.Note. Parking bay is
defined in the Dictionary.
(6) If the road has a continuous dividing line or a dividing strip,
the driver must position the vehicle at least 3 metres from the continuous
dividing line or dividing strip, unless otherwise indicated by information on
or with a parking control sign.Note. Dividing line
and dividing
strip are defined in the Dictionary.
(7) If the road does not have a continuous dividing line or a dividing
strip, the driver must position the vehicle so there is at least 3 metres of
the road alongside the vehicle that is clear for other vehicles to pass,
unless otherwise indicated by information on or with a parking control
sign.
(8) The driver must position the vehicle so the vehicle does not
unreasonably obstruct the path of other vehicles or
pedestrians.
(9) This rule does not apply to:(a) a driver if the driver parks on a length of road, or in an area,
to which a parking control sign or road marking applies, and information on or
with the sign or road marking includes the words “angle parking”
or “angle”, or
(b) the rider of a motor bike if the rider parks the motor bike on a
length of road, or in an area, to which a permissive parking sign
applies and the sign indicates that the length of road or area is for parking
motor bikes.
Note
1. Motor
bike and road marking
are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Division 9 deals with angle parking.
(10) Subrules (3) and (4) do not apply to the rider of a motor bike if
the rider positions the motor bike so at least 1 wheel is as near as
practicable to the far left or far right side of the
road.
(11) If a road has one or more service roads, the part of the road used
by the main body of moving vehicles, and each service road, is taken to be a
separate road for this rule.Note. Part
of the road used by the main body of moving vehicles and service road
are defined in the Dictionary.
(12) In this rule:continuous
dividing line means:
(a) a single continuous dividing line only, or
(b) a single continuous dividing line to the left or right of a broken
dividing line, or
(c) 2 parallel continuous dividing lines.
road
does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note. Road related
area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
Example.
Parallel parking—minimum distance from other vehicles and
dividing strip  |
In the example, the vehicles marked with an “X” are
parked in contravention of this rule.
208A Parallel parking in a road related area (except in a
median strip parking area)
(1) A driver who parks in a road related area (except in a median
strip parking area) must position the driver’s vehicle to face:(a) in the direction of travel of vehicles in the marked lane or line
of traffic next to the part of the road related area where the driver parks,
or
(b) if there is no traffic next to that part of the road related
area—in the direction in which vehicles could lawfully travel in the
road related area, or
(c) if the road related area is an area that divides a
road—either:(i) in the direction of travel of vehicles in the marked lane or line
of traffic to the left of the driver, or
(ii) if there is no traffic to the left of the driver—in the
direction in which vehicles could lawfully travel on that part of the
road.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Driver’s
vehicle, line of
traffic, marked lane and
median strip
parking area are defined in the Dictionary and road related
area is defined in rule 13.
(2) Subrule (1) does not apply if:(a) another law of this jurisdiction permits the driver to park in
another manner in the road related area, or
(b) signs or road markings indicate that angle parking is required in
the road related area.
209 Parallel parking in a median strip parking
area
(1) This rule applies to a driver who parks in a median strip parking
area if a parking control sign or road marking applies to the area, and
information on or with the sign or road marking indicates that the
driver’s vehicle must be positioned parallel to the median
strip.Note. Driver’s
vehicle, median strip,
median strip
parking area, parking control
sign, road marking
and with are
defined in the Dictionary.
(2) The driver must position the driver’s vehicle:(a) to face:(i) in the direction of travel of vehicles in the marked lane or line
of traffic to the left of the driver, or
(ii) if there is no traffic to the left of the driver—in the
direction in which vehicles could lawfully travel on that part of the road,
and
(b) parallel, and as near as practicable, to the centre of the median
strip, and
(c) if the driver does not park in a parking bay—at least 1
metre from the closest point of any vehicle in front of it and any vehicle
behind it.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Marked lane and
parking
bay are defined in the Dictionary.
(3) This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor
bike.Note. Motor
bike is defined in the Dictionary.
Division 9 Angle parking
Note 1. Park and
stop are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 165 provides defences to the prosecution of a driver for an
offence against a provision of this Division.
210 Angle parking
(1) If a driver parks in a parking area on the side of a road, or in a
median strip parking area:(a) to which a parking control sign with the words “angle
parking” or “angle” applies, or
(b) to which a road marking indicating an angle
applies,
the driver must position the driver’s vehicle in accordance with
subrules (2) to (4).Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Driver’s
vehicle, median strip
parking area, parking area,
parking
control sign, road marking
and with are
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 212 deals with whether a driver enters a median strip parking
area forwards or in reverse.
(2) If the parking control sign or road marking indicates that the
vehicle must be positioned at a specified angle (other than 90°), the
driver must position the vehicle:(a) so that the vehicle is at an angle as near as practicable to the
specified angle, and
(b) if the vehicle is parked on the side of the road—with the
rear of the vehicle nearest to the centre of the
road.
(2A) If the parking control sign or road marking does not indicate the
angle at which the vehicle must be positioned, the driver must position the
vehicle:(a) so that the vehicle is at an angle as near as practicable to
45°, as shown in example 1 or 2, and
(b) if the vehicle is parked on the side of the road—with the
rear of the vehicle nearest to the centre of the
road.
Examples.
Example 1 Parking at 45° at the side of a two-way road  | Example 2 Parking at 45° at the right side of a one-way road  |
(2B) Subrules (2) and (2A) do not apply if the road marking, or
information on the parking control sign, includes the words “rear
in” or similar words.
(3) If the parking control sign or road marking indicates that the
vehicle must be positioned at an angle of 90°, the driver:(a) must position the driver’s vehicle so the vehicle is at an
angle as near as practicable to 90°, as shown in example 3 or 4,
and
(b) if the vehicle is parked on the side of the road:(i) if the road marking, or information on the parking control sign,
includes the words “rear in” or “front in”, or similar
words—must position the vehicle so that the front of the vehicle is
nearest the centre of the road, or the rear of the vehicle is nearest the
centre of the road, in accordance with the road marking or sign,
or
(ii) otherwise—may position the vehicle either way
around.
Examples.
Example 3 Parking at 90° at the side of a two-way road  | Example 4 Parking at 90° at the right side of a one-way road  |
(4) If the road marking, or information on the parking control sign,
includes the words “rear in”, or similar words, the driver must
position the driver’s vehicle:(a) so that the vehicle is at an angle as near as practicable
to:(i) the angle indicated by the road marking or parking control sign,
or
(ii) if the road marking or parking control sign does not indicate an
angle—45°, and
(b) if the vehicle is parked on the side of the road—with the
front of the vehicle nearest to the centre of the
road.
(4A) Subrule (4) does not apply if the parking control sign or road
marking indicates that the vehicle must be positioned at an angle of
90°.Examples
for subrule (4).
Example 5 Parking “rear in” at 30° at the side of a
road  | Example 6 Parking “rear in” at 30° in a median strip parking
area  |
Example 7 Parking “rear in” at 45° at the side of a
road  | Example 8 Parking “rear in” at 45° in a median strip parking
area  |
Example 9 Parking “rear in” at 60° at the side of a
road  | Example 10 Parking “rear in” at 60° in a median strip parking
area  |
(5) This rule does not apply to the rider of a motor
bike.Note. Motor
bike is defined in the Dictionary.
Division 10 Other parking related rules
Note 1. Area, length of road, park and stop are defined in the
Dictionary.
Note 2. Rule 165 provides defences to the prosecution of a driver for an
offence against a provision of this Division.
211 Parking in parking bays
(1) This rule applies to a driver who parks on a length of road, or in
an area, that has parking bays (whether or not a park in bays only
sign applies to the length of road or area).Note. Parking bay is
defined in the Dictionary.
Park in bays only sign  |
(2) The driver must position the driver’s vehicle completely
within a single parking bay, unless the vehicle is too wide or long to fit
completely within the bay.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Driver’s
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Vehicle includes a
combination—see rule 15 (d).
(3) If the vehicle is too wide or long to fit completely within a
single parking bay, the driver must park the driver’s vehicle within the
minimum number of parking bays needed to park the vehicle.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3–1) This rule does not apply to a driver parking in a pay parking
area.
Note
1. Pay
parking area is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 211 of the Australian
Road Rules. Rules 207–1 to 207–9 make provision
for parking in pay parking areas.
212 Entering and leaving a median strip parking
area
(1) If information on or with a traffic control device indicates that
a driver must enter or leave a median strip parking area in a particular
direction, the driver must enter or leave the area in that
direction.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Median strip
parking area, traffic control
device and with are defined in
the Dictionary.
(2) If there is no information on or with a traffic control device
that indicates that a driver must enter or leave a median strip parking area
in a particular direction, the driver must enter or leave the area by driving
forward.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
Example.
Leaving median strip parking area by driving forward  |
213 Making a motor vehicle secure
(1) This rule applies to the driver of a motor vehicle who stops and
leaves the vehicle on a road, except so far as the driver is exempt from this
rule by an exemption order under rule 213–1 or an exemption under rule
313A (2).Note
1. Motor
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Subrule (1) is not uniform with the corresponding subrule in rule
213 of the Australian Road Rules.
However, the corresponding subrule in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of
this jurisdiction to provide for drivers to be exempted from this rule.
Different rules may apply in other Australian
jurisdictions.
(2) Before leaving the vehicle, the driver must apply the parking
brake effectively or, if weather conditions (for example, snow) would prevent
the effective operation of the parking brake, effectively restrain the motor
vehicle’s movement in another way.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) If the driver will be over 3 metres from the closest part of the
vehicle, the driver must switch off the engine before leaving the
vehicle.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(4) If the driver will be over 3 metres from the closest part of the
vehicle, and:(a) there is no-one left in the vehicle, or
(b) there is only a child or children under 16 years old left in the
vehicle,
the driver must remove the ignition key before leaving the
vehicle.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(5) If the driver will be over 3 metres from the closest part of the
vehicle and there is no-one left in the vehicle, the driver must:(a) if the windows of the vehicle can be secured—secure the
windows immediately before leaving the vehicle, and
(b) if the doors of the vehicle can be locked—lock the doors
immediately after leaving the vehicle.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Window is defined
in the Dictionary.
(6) For the purposes of subrule (5), a window is secure even if it is
open by up to 2 centimetres.
213–1 NSW rule: exemption orders for rule
213
(cf RRR, cl 22A)
(1) The Authority may, by order in writing (an exemption
order), exempt any class of motor vehicles from the operation of
rule 213 (3) and (4) if the Authority is satisfied that:(a) such vehicles are used for the purpose of delivering or collecting
goods (including money) in circumstances that require the drivers of those
vehicles to enter and leave those vehicles at frequent intervals,
and
(b) the engines of such vehicles have to be kept running in order to
operate equipment used in connection with the use of those vehicles for that
purpose.
Note. Authority is
defined in the Act.
(2) An exemption order may be made subject to such conditions as the
Authority considers appropriate.
(3) For the purposes of rule 213 (1), the driver of a vehicle to which
an exemption order applies is exempt from the operation of rule 213 (3) and
(4) so long as the driver complies with any condition to which the order is
subject.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
Part 13 Lights and warning devices
Division 1 Lights on vehicles (except bicycles, animals and
animal-drawn vehicles)
214 Division does not apply to riders of bicycles, animals or
animal-drawn vehicles
This Division does not apply to the rider of a bicycle, animal or
animal-drawn vehicle.Note
1. Bicycle is defined in the
Dictionary.
Note
2. The rules for using lights when riding a bicycle or an
animal-drawn vehicle at night, or in hazardous weather conditions, are:• for riders of bicycles—rule 259
• for riders of animal-drawn vehicles—rule
223.
214–1 NSW rule: interpretation
(cf RRR, cl 52)
In this Division:dipping
device has the same meaning as in the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation
2007.
fog
light means a light used to improve the illumination of the road in
case of fog, snowfall, heavy rain or a dust storm.
headlight means a headlight
of the kind referred to in the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation
2007.
period of
darkness means:
(a) any time during the night, or
(b) any other time when there is insufficient daylight to render a
person dressed in dark clothing discernible at a distance of 100
metres.
Note
1. Night is defined in the
Dictionary.
Note
2. There are no corresponding definitions for the purposes of
Division 1 of Part 13 of the Australian Road
Rules. These definitions are required for the purposes of the
NSW rules contained in this Division.
215 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
* * * * *Note. Rule 215 (Using lights when driving at night or in hazardous
weather conditions) of the Australian Road
Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules. This rule has
been left blank in order to preserve uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road
Rules.
215–1 NSW rule: using lights when driving in
dark
(cf RRR, cl 53)
(1) A driver must not drive during a period of darkness unless the
lights required by Schedule 2 to the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation
2007 to be fitted to the vehicle are lighted.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Period of
darkness is defined in rule 214–1.
(2) Subrule (1) does not apply to any lights required or permitted
during a period of darkness under these Rules or Schedule 2 to the Road Transport (Vehicle
Registration) Regulation 2007 to be extinguished by the
operation of a dipping device or otherwise.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. This rule applies in
this jurisdiction instead of rule 215 of the Australian Road
Rules.
216 Towing a vehicle at night or in hazardous weather
conditions
(1) A driver must not tow a vehicle at night, or in hazardous weather
conditions causing reduced visibility unless:(a) if the towed vehicle is being towed from the front of the
vehicle:(i) the tail lights of the vehicle are operating effectively and are
clearly visible, or
(ii) the vehicle has portable rear lights that are operating,
or
(b) if the towed vehicle is being towed from the rear of the
vehicle—the vehicle has portable rear lights that are
operating.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Night is defined in
the Dictionary.
(2) However, this rule does not apply to the driver of a tow truck
if:(a) the driver is towing a disabled vehicle carrying a placard load of
dangerous goods to a place that is safely off the road,
and
(b) a vehicle carrying a warning to other traffic is following
immediately behind the disabled vehicle.
(3) In this rule:portable rear
lights means:
(a) for a vehicle being towed from the front of the vehicle—a
pair of lights attached to the rear of the vehicle that, when operating, show
a red light that is clearly visible for at least 200 metres from the rear of
the vehicle, and
(b) for a vehicle being towed from the rear of the vehicle—a
pair of lights attached to the front of the vehicle that, when operating, show
a red light that is clearly visible for at least 200 metres from the front of
the vehicle.
road
does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note
1. Road related
area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
Note
2. The definitions of dangerous
goods and placard load in
rule 216 (3) have not been reproduced in these Rules. Those definitions in the
Australian Road Rules allow the
terms to be defined in another law of this jurisdiction. Accordingly, dangerous
goods and placard
load are defined in the Dictionary.
217 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
* * * * *Note
1. Rule 217 (Using fog lights) of the Australian Road Rules has not been
reproduced in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve
uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road
Rules.
218 Using headlights on high-beam
(1) The driver of a vehicle must not use the vehicle’s
headlights on high-beam, or allow the vehicle’s headlights to be used on
high-beam, if the driver is driving:(a) less than 200 metres behind a vehicle travelling in the same
direction as the driver, or
(b) less than 200 metres from an oncoming
vehicle.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. High-beam and
oncoming
vehicle are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) However, if the driver is overtaking a vehicle, the driver may
briefly switch the headlights from low-beam to high-beam immediately before
the driver begins to overtake the vehicle.Note. Low-beam and
overtake
are defined in the Dictionary.
Examples.
Example 1 Using headlights on low-beam when travelling less than 200 metres
behind another vehicle travelling in the same direction  |
Example 2 Using headlights on low-beam when travelling within 200 metres of an
oncoming vehicle  |
218–1 NSW rule: using lights on vehicles
generally
(cf RRR, cl 55)
The driver of a vehicle must not:(a) use any fog light fitted to the vehicle unless the driver is
driving in fog, mist or under other atmospheric conditions that restrict
visibility, or
(b) use any spot or search light fitted to the vehicle unless:(i) the vehicle is stationary and the light is used only for the
purpose of examining or making adjustments or repairs to a vehicle, and the
light from the light is not projected more than 6 metres,
or
(ii) the light is used for the temporary purpose of reading any finger
or notice board or house number, or
(iii) the vehicle is being driven or used by a police officer in the
performance of the officer’s duty, or
(iv) the vehicle is being used by a governmental or semi-governmental
or local government or other authority in connection with its functions,
or
(c) use any additional headlight permitted to be fitted to the vehicle
by Schedule 2 to the Road
Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2007 when the
vehicle is being driven on a length of road for which there is provision for
the lighting by means of road lighting or when any approaching vehicle is
visible to the driver, or
(d) flash any headlight or additional headlight permitted to be fitted
to the vehicle by clause 86 (6) of Schedule 2 to the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation
2007 unless:(i) the vehicle is being used to respond to an emergency,
and
(ii) the vehicle is being driven by a person who is authorised to drive
the vehicle and wears a badge or other distinguishing mark indicating that
authority, or
(e) use any light permitted to be fitted to the vehicle by clause 124
(4)–(9) of Schedule 2 to the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation
2007 unless:(i) the vehicle is standing in a hazardous position or moving in
hazardous circumstances, or
(ii) the vehicle is an ambulance, police vehicle, fire fighting
vehicle, mines rescue or other rescue vehicle, Red Cross vehicle or another
emergency vehicle that is being used for urgent purposes arising from an
accident, fire or other emergency, or
(iii) the vehicle is a motor vehicle or trailer that is transporting any
load that exceeds the maximum length, width or height limits set out in
Schedule 2 to the Road
Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation 2007 or any other
vehicle used to escort such vehicles and either vehicle is being used for such
purposes, or
(iv) the vehicle is being used by the Authority for law enforcement
purposes, or
(f) use any device referred to in clause 125 of Schedule 2 to the
Road Transport (Vehicle
Registration) Regulation 2007 or any hazard warning signal
complying with the requirements of the third edition ADR relating to the
installation of lighting and light-signalling devices:(i) if the vehicle is not a bus—unless the vehicle is standing
in a hazardous position or moving in hazardous conditions,
or
(ii) if the vehicle is a bus—unless the bus is standing in a
hazardous position or moving in hazardous conditions or while the bus is
stopped to allow a passenger to get on or off the
bus.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Bus,
emergency
vehicle, motor vehicle,
police
officer, police vehicle,
third edition
ADR and trailer are defined in
the Dictionary, and vehicle is defined in
rule 15. Fog
light, headlight and period of
darkness are defined in rule 214–1, and Authority is defined
in the Act.
Note
2. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. This rule applies in
this jurisdiction instead of rules 215, 217, 221 and 222 of the Australian Road
Rules.
219 Lights not to be used to dazzle other road
users
A driver must not use, or allow to be used, any light fitted to or
in the driver’s vehicle to dazzle, or in a way that is likely to dazzle,
another road user.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Driver’s
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary, and road user is defined in
rule 14.
Note
2. Driver includes a person
in control of a vehicle—see the definition of drive in the
Dictionary.
220 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
* * * * *Note. Rule 220 (Using lights on vehicles that are stopped) of the
Australian Road Rules has not been
reproduced in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve
uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road
Rules.
220–1 NSW rule: using lights on stationary
vehicles
(cf RRR, cl 58)
(1) A driver must not stand a motor vehicle or trailer on a road
during a period of darkness unless the rear light and any clearance or side
marker light required to be fitted to the vehicle by Schedule 2 to the Road Transport (Vehicle
Registration) Regulation 2007 are lighted.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Motor
vehicle and trailer are
defined in the Dictionary and period of
darkness is defined in rule 214–1.
(2) Subrule (1) does not apply to:(a) a driver who stands the driver’s vehicle on a length of road
with street light that renders a motor vehicle or trailer clearly visible,
or
(b) a rider of a motor bike to which a sidecar is not
attached.
Note. Driver’s
vehicle, length of road,
motor
bike, motor
vehicle, sidecar and
trailer
are defined in the Dictionary.
(3) A driver must not stand a motor vehicle on a road during a period
of darkness with its headlight lighted while the vehicle is not actually
engaged in dropping off, or picking up, passengers.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. This rule applies in
this jurisdiction instead of rule 220 of the Australian Road
Rules.
221 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
* * * * *Note. Rule 221 (Using hazard warning lights) of the Australian Road Rules has not been
reproduced in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve
uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road
Rules.
221–1 NSW rule: using crimson flashing warning lights
on certain local council vehicles
(cf RRR, cl 56)
(1) Without limiting rule 218–1 (e), a driver must not use any
crimson flashing warning light permitted to be fixed to a motor vehicle by
clause 124 (4)–(9) of Schedule 2 to the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation
2007 unless the vehicle is being used by an employee of a
local council for the purposes of enforcing excess weight limits
legislation.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Local
council and motor
vehicle are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) In this rule:excess
weight limits legislation means any of the following:
(a) Chapter 3 of the Road Transport
(General) Act 2005,
(b) the Road
Transport (Mass, Loading and Access) Regulation
2005.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
221–2 NSW rule: using flashing warning lights on street
vending vehicles
(cf RRR, cl 57)
(1) The driver of a street vending vehicle must cause any prescribed
flashing warning light that is fitted to the vehicle to be lighted while the
vehicle is standing for the purpose of attending to customers.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) Except as provided by subrule (1), the driver of a street vending
vehicle must not cause or permit any prescribed flashing warning light that is
fitted to the vehicle to be lighted while the vehicle is on a
road.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) In this rule:prescribed
flashing warning light means the light required to be fitted to
street vending vehicles by clause 126 (Flashing lights on other
vehicles—street vending vehicles) of Schedule 2 to the Road Transport (Vehicle
Registration) Regulation 2007.
street vending
vehicle has the same meaning as in the Road Transport (Vehicle Registration) Regulation
2007.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
222 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
* * * * *Note. Rule 222 (Using warning lights on buses carrying children) of the
Australian Road Rules has not been
reproduced in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve
uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road
Rules.
222–1 NSW rule: using four-way flashers on school
buses
(cf RRR, cl 93 (1), (2), (6) and (7))
(1) If a bus fitted with a four-way flasher is being driven for school
purposes, the driver must operate the four-way flasher when the bus is stopped
to allow passengers to get on or off the bus.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Bus is defined in the
Dictionary.
(2) For the purposes of this rule, a bus is driven for school purposes
if the bus is being used:(a) solely or principally for the conveyance of children to or from
school, and
(b) on a journey wholly outside a transport
district.
Note. Transport
district is defined in the Dictionary.
(3) This rule does not apply to the driver of a bus that is operated
in accordance with rule 222–2.Note. Rule 222–2 provides for the use by drivers of warning
systems fitted to buses used to convey school children.
(4) In this rule:four-way
flasher means:
(a) a device referred to in clause 125 (1) of Schedule 2 to the
Road Transport (Vehicle
Registration) Regulation 2007, or
(b) direction indicator lights that can be operated as referred to in
clause 113 (4) of that Schedule, or
(c) any hazard warning signal device complying with the requirements
of the third edition ADR relating to the installation of lighting and
light-signalling devices.
Note
1. Third
edition ADR is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
222–2 NSW rule: using warning systems for buses
carrying school children
(cf RRR, cl 94)
(1) A driver must not drive a bus for school purposes unless a warning
system is attached to the bus.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) The driver of a bus being used for school purposes must activate
the flashing lights of a warning system when stopping the bus to drop off, or
pick up, children.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) The driver of a bus must not activate the flashing lights of a
warning system fitted to the bus when the bus is not being used for school
purposes.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(4) For the purposes of this rule, a bus is driven or used for school
purposes if:(a) it is being used to convey children (whether with or without adult
passengers) to or from school:(i) between 7.00 am and 9.30 am on a weekday, or
(ii) between 2.30 pm and 5.00 pm on a weekday,
or
(b) it is used solely for the purpose of conveying children to or from
school.
(5) This rule does not apply to the following drivers:(a) the driver of a bus:(i) that is operating on charter for a school excursion or being used
for community service activities, and
(ii) where no individual fares are being directly collected or school
passes used,
(b) the driver of a bus that is owned by a person that the Authority
has exempted from compliance with clause 94 of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management)
Regulation 1999.
Note. Authority is
defined in the Act.
(6) In this rule:warning system
has the same meaning as in clause 94 of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management)
Regulation 1999.
Note
1. Clause 94 of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management)
Regulation 1999 requires the owner of a bus that is used for
school purposes not to permit the bus to be driven unless a warning system is
attached to the bus.
Note
2. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
Division 2 Lights on animal-drawn vehicles
223 Using lights when riding an animal-drawn vehicle at night
or in hazardous weather conditions
A person must not ride an animal-drawn vehicle at night, or in
hazardous weather conditions causing reduced visibility, unless the vehicle is
fitted with, and displays:(a) a white light fitted at or towards the front of each side of the
vehicle that is clearly visible for at least 200 metres from the front of the
vehicle, and
(b) a red light fitted at or towards the rear of each side of the
vehicle that is clearly visible for at least 200 metres from the rear of the
vehicle, and
(c) a red reflector fitted at or towards the rear of each side of the
vehicle that is:(i) not over 1.5 metres above ground level, and
(ii) clearly visible for at least 50 metres from the rear of the
vehicle when light is projected onto it by another vehicle’s headlight
on low-beam.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Low-beam and night are defined in the
Dictionary.
Division 3 Horns and radar detectors
224 Using horns and similar warning devices
A driver must not use, or allow to be used, a horn, or similar
warning device, fitted to or in the driver’s vehicle unless:(a) it is necessary to use the horn, or warning device, to warn other
road users or animals of the approach or position of the vehicle,
or
(b) the horn, or warning device, is being used as part of an
anti-theft device, or an alcohol interlock device, fitted to the
vehicle.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Driver’s
vehicle and alcohol interlock
device are defined in the Dictionary and road user is defined in
rule 14.
Note
2. Driver includes a person
in control of a vehicle—see the definition of drive in the
Dictionary.
225 Australian Road Rule not reproduced
* * * * *Note
1. Rule 225 (Using radar detectors and similar devices) of the
Australian Road Rules has not been
reproduced in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve
uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road
Rules.Rule 225 of the Australian Road
Rules is unnecessary in this jurisdiction because section 48
(2) of the Act makes it an offence for a person to drive a motor vehicle, or
cause a motor vehicle or trailer to stand, on a road or road related area if a
prohibited speed measuring evasion article is fitted or applied to, or carried
in, the vehicle or trailer.
Division 4 Portable warning triangles for heavy
vehicles
226 Heavy vehicles to be equipped with portable warning
triangles
(1) A person must not drive a vehicle with a GVM over 12 tonnes unless
the vehicle is equipped with at least 3 portable warning
triangles.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Portable
warning triangle is defined in the Dictionary, and GVM is defined in the
Act.
(2) The person must produce the portable warning triangles for
inspection if the person is directed to do so by a police officer or an
authorised person.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Authorised
person and police
officer are defined in the Dictionary.
(2–1) This rule does not apply to the driver of a bus that is being used
to provide a regular bus service wholly within a transport
district.Note
1. Bus, regular bus
service and transport
district are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 226 of the Australian
Road Rules.
227 Using portable warning triangles
(1) This rule applies to a driver if the GVM of the driver’s
vehicle is over 12 tonnes.Note. Driver’s
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary, and GVM is defined in the
Act.
(2) If the driver stops on a road, or if some or all of any load being
carried by the vehicle falls on to a road, at a place where the speed limit is
80 kilometres per hour or more and the vehicle is not visible at any time for
at least 300 metres in all directions from that place, the driver must use at
least 3 portable warning triangles, placed in accordance with subrule (4), to
warn other road users of the vehicle or load.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Portable
warning triangle is defined in the Dictionary, road is defined in
subrule (7) and road user is
defined in rule 14.
(3) If the driver stops on a road, or if some or all of any load being
carried by the vehicle falls on to a road, at a place where the speed limit is
less than 80 kilometres per hour and the vehicle is not visible at any time
for at least 200 metres in all directions from that place, the driver must use
at least 3 portable warning triangles, placed in accordance with subrule (5),
to warn other road users of the vehicle or load.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(4) For the purposes of subrule (2), the driver must:(a) place 1 triangle at least 200 metres, but not over 250 metres,
behind the vehicle or fallen load, and
(b) if the vehicle or fallen load is on a one-way or divided road,
place 1 triangle between the triangle required by paragraph (a) and the
vehicle or fallen load, and
(c) if the vehicle or fallen load is not on a one-way or divided road,
place 1 triangle at least 200 metres, but not over 250 metres, in front of the
vehicle or fallen load, and
(d) place 1 triangle at the side of the vehicle, or fallen load, in a
position that gives sufficient warning to other road users of the position of
the vehicle or fallen load.
Note. One-way road is
defined in the Dictionary and divided road is
defined in subrule (7).
(5) For the purposes of subrule (3), the driver must:(a) place 1 triangle at least 50 metres, but not over 150 metres,
behind the vehicle or fallen load, and
(b) if the vehicle or fallen load is on a one-way or divided road,
place 1 triangle between the triangle required by paragraph (a) and the
vehicle or fallen load, and
(c) if the vehicle or fallen load is not on a one-way or divided road,
place 1 triangle at least 50 metres, but not over 150 metres, in front of the
vehicle or fallen load, and
(d) place 1 triangle at the side of the vehicle, or fallen load, in a
position that gives sufficient warning to other road users of the position of
the vehicle or fallen load.
(6) A reference to “the vehicle or fallen load” in
subrules (4) and (5) is to be read as a reference to “the vehicle or
fallen load, as the case may be”.
(6–1) This rule does not:(a) apply to the driver of a bus that is being used to provide a
regular bus service wholly within a transport district, or
(b) require the driver of a vehicle to place a triangle in front of
the vehicle if the vehicle is on a one-way or divided
road.
Note
1. Bus, regular bus
service and transport
district are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 227 of the Australian
Road Rules.
(7) In this rule:divided
road means any length of a two-way road that has a median strip
(other than a painted median strip).
road
does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note
1. Median strip
and two-way
road are defined in the Dictionary, road related
area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
Note
2. Although the presence of a median strip is necessary to establish
that a road is a divided road, for the purposes of this rule the median strip
is not part of the road (as it is a road related area).
Note
3. The definition of divided road is
not uniform with the corresponding definition in rule 227 of the Australian Road Rules. Different
definitions may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
Part 14 Rules for pedestrians
Division 1 General
Note 1. For these Rules, a pedestrian includes:• a person driving a motorised wheelchair that cannot travel at over
10 kilometres per hour (on level ground)
• a person in a non-motorised wheelchair
• a person pushing a motorised or non-motorised
wheelchair
• a person in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy
(see rule 18).
Note 2. Wheelchair, wheeled recreational
device and wheeled
toy are defined in the Dictionary.
228 No pedestrians signs
A pedestrian must not travel past a no pedestrians
sign.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
No pedestrians sign  |
229 Pedestrians on a road with a road access sign
A pedestrian must not be on a length of road to which a road
access sign applies if information on or with the sign indicates that
pedestrians are not permitted beyond the sign.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Length of road and
with are defined in
the Dictionary.
Note
2. For the way in which a road access sign applies, see rule
97. The sign is usually used on a freeway.
Road access sign  |
Note for
diagram. The sign may indicate that it applies to different or additional
vehicles or persons—see rule 316 (4).
229–1 NSW Rule: exemption from prohibition on
pedestrians being on a road with a road access sign
Rule 229 does not apply to:(a) the driver or passenger of a truck while in a truck parking area,
or
(b) the driver of a public bus used to provide a public passenger
service, while in a bus parking area, or
(c) a person approaching or waiting in a bus zone or at a bus stop to
be picked up as a passenger on a public bus providing a public passenger
service, or a person leaving a bus zone or bus stop after being dropped off as
such a passenger, or
(d) a person who is authorised to maintain facilities in a bus parking
area, while in the bus parking area for that
purpose.
Note
1. Bus
parking area, footpath, public bus, public passenger
service, truck and truck parking
area are defined in the Dictionary. Bus zone is defined in
rule 183 (2).
Note
2. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
230 Crossing a road—general
(1) A pedestrian crossing a road:(a) must cross by the shortest safe route, and
(b) must not stay on the road longer than necessary to cross the road
safely.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) However, if the pedestrian is crossing the road at an intersection
with traffic lights and a pedestrians may cross diagonally sign, the
pedestrian may cross the road diagonally at the intersection.Note. Intersection
and traffic
lights are defined in the Dictionary.
(3) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note. Road related
area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
Pedestrians may cross diagonally sign  |
231 Crossing a road at pedestrian lights
(1) A pedestrian approaching or at an intersection, or another place
on a road, with pedestrian lights and traffic lights must comply with this
rule.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Intersection,
pedestrian
lights and traffic
lights are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) If the pedestrian lights show a red pedestrian light and the
pedestrian has not already started crossing the intersection or road, the
pedestrian must not start to cross until the pedestrian lights change to
green.Note
1. Green pedestrian
light and red pedestrian
light are defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. A traffic control device (including pedestrian lights) generally
only applies to a person if the device faces the person—see Part 20,
Division 3, especially rule 340.
(3) If, while the pedestrian is crossing the road, the pedestrian
lights change to flashing red or red, the pedestrian must not stay on the road
for longer than necessary to cross safely to the nearer (in the direction of
travel of the pedestrian) of the following:(a) a dividing strip, safety zone, or traffic island, forming part of
the area set aside or used by pedestrians to cross the road at the
intersection or place (the safety
area),
(b) the nearest side of the road.
Note. Dividing
strip and traffic
island are defined in the Dictionary, and safety zone is
defined in rule 162.
(4) If, under subrule (3), the pedestrian crosses to the safety area,
the pedestrian must remain in the safety area until the pedestrian lights
change to green.
(5) However, if the pedestrian cannot operate the pedestrian lights
from the safety area, the pedestrian may cross to the far side of the road
when:(a) the traffic lights change to green or flashing yellow, or there is
no red traffic light showing, and
(b) it is safe to do so.
Note. Red traffic
light is defined in the Dictionary.
(6) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note. Road related
area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
Red pedestrian light showing red pedestrian symbol  | Green pedestrian light showing green pedestrian symbol  |
232 Crossing a road at traffic lights
(1) A pedestrian approaching or at an intersection, or another place
on a road, with traffic lights, but without pedestrian lights, must comply
with this rule.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Intersection,
pedestrian
lights and traffic
lights are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) If the traffic lights show a red or yellow traffic light and the
pedestrian has not already started crossing the intersection or road, the
pedestrian must not start to cross until the traffic lights change to green or
flashing yellow, or there is no red traffic light showing.Note. Green traffic
light, red traffic
light and yellow traffic
light are defined in the Dictionary.
(3) If, while the pedestrian is crossing the road, the traffic lights
change to yellow or red, the pedestrian must not stay on the road for longer
than necessary to cross safely to the nearer (in the direction of travel of
the pedestrian) of the following:(a) a dividing strip, safety zone, or traffic island, forming part of
the area set aside or used by pedestrians to cross the road at the
intersection or place (the safety
area),
(b) the far side of the road.
Note. Dividing
strip and traffic
island are defined in the Dictionary, and safety zone is
defined in rule 162.
(3A) Despite subrule (3), in the circumstances set out in that subrule
the pedestrian may instead return to the side of the road, or to the safety
area, that he or she has just left, but only if:(a) at the time the lights change, that side or safety area is closer
to him or her than the side or safety area (whichever is the closer) that he
or she was heading for at that time, and
(b) he or she does not stay on the road for longer than is necessary
to return to that side or safety area.
(4) If, under subrule (3), the pedestrian crosses to the safety area,
the pedestrian must remain in the safety area until the traffic lights change
to green or flashing yellow, or there is no red traffic light
showing.
(5) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note. Road related
area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
233 Crossing a road to or from a tram
(1) A pedestrian must not cross a road to get on a tram at a tram stop
until the tram has stopped at the tram stop.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Tram is defined in the
Dictionary.
(2) A pedestrian crossing a road after getting off a tram:(a) must cross to the nearest footpath by the shortest safe route or,
if there is no footpath, cross the road by the shortest safe route,
and
(b) must not stay on the road for longer than necessary to cross the
road safely.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Footpath is
defined in the Dictionary.
(3) This rule does not apply to a pedestrian:(a) on a safety zone, or
(b) crossing a road to or from a safety
zone.
Note. Safety zone is
defined in rule 162.
(4) Subrule (2) does not apply to:(a) a pedestrian in a shared zone, or
(b) an employee of a public transport operator who is in uniform and
engaged in carrying out his or her duties.
Note. Shared zone is
defined in rule 24.
(5) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
tram
includes a bus travelling along tram tracks.
Note
1. Bus and travelling
along tram tracks are defined in the Dictionary, road related
area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
Note
2. For the duties of drivers where there are pedestrians getting on
or off trams or buses, or in safety zones, see rules 162 to
164A.
234 Crossing a road on or near a crossing for
pedestrians
(1) A pedestrian must not cross a road, or part of a road, within 20
metres of a crossing on the road, except at the crossing or another crossing,
unless the pedestrian is:(a) crossing, or helping another pedestrian to cross, an area of the
road between tram tracks and the far left side of the road to get on, or after
getting off, a tram or public bus, or
(b) crossing to or from a safety zone, or
(c) crossing at an intersection with traffic lights and a
pedestrians may cross diagonally sign, or
(d) crossing in a shared zone, or
(e) crossing a road, or a part of a road, from which vehicles are
excluded, either permanently or temporarily.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Intersection,
public
bus, traffic
lights, tram and tram tracks are
defined in the Dictionary, safety zone is
defined in rule 162, and shared zone is
defined in rule 24.
(2) A pedestrian must not stay on a crossing on a road for longer than
necessary to cross the road safely.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) Subrule (2) does not apply to a person who:(a) has been authorised to conduct a scheme under Part 10 (Child
safety) of the Road
Transport (Safety and Traffic Management) Regulation 1999,
and
(b) is on the crossing for the purpose of carrying out the
scheme.
Note
1. Subrule (3) is not uniform with the corresponding subrule in rule
234 of the Australian Road Rules.
However, the corresponding subrule in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of
this jurisdiction to permit a person who is helping pedestrians cross a road
at a crossing to stay on the crossing for longer than is necessary for road
safety. Different rules may apply in other Australian
jurisdictions.
Note
2. Part 10 (Child safety) of the Road Transport (Safety and Traffic Management)
Regulation 1999 enables the Authority to authorise persons to
conduct schemes designed to assist children to cross roads with
safety.
(4) In this rule:crossing means a
children’s crossing, marked foot crossing or pedestrian
crossing.
Note. Children’s
crossing is defined in rule 80, marked foot
crossing is defined in the Dictionary, and pedestrian
crossing is defined in rule 81.
Pedestrians may cross diagonally sign  |
235 Crossing a level crossing
(1) A pedestrian must not cross a railway line, or tram tracks, at a
level crossing unless:(a) there is a pedestrian facility at the crossing and the pedestrian
uses the facility, or
(b) there is no pedestrian facility at, or within 20 metres of, the
crossing.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Level crossing is defined in rule 120.
Note
2. If the pedestrian facility is a footpath or shared path at which
there is a red pedestrian light, rule 235A imposes further obligations on
pedestrians using the facility.
(2) A pedestrian must not cross a railway line, or tram tracks, at a
level crossing if:(a) warning lights (for example, twin red lights or rotating red
lights) are flashing or warning bells are ringing, or
(b) a gate, boom or barrier at the crossing is closed or is opening or
closing, or
(c) a train or tram is on or entering the crossing,
or
(d) a train or tram approaching the crossing can be seen from the
crossing or is sounding a warning, and there would be a danger of the
pedestrian being struck by the train or tram if the pedestrian entered the
crossing, or
(e) the crossing, or a road beyond the crossing, is
blocked.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Example for
subrule (2) (e). The crossing, or a road beyond the crossing, may be blocked by
congested traffic, a disabled vehicle, a collision between vehicles or between
a vehicle and a pedestrian, or by stock on the road.
Note. Enter and twin red
lights are defined in the Dictionary.
(2A) If any of the following events occurs after a pedestrian has
started to cross a railway line, or tram tracks, at a level crossing, he or
she must finish crossing the line or tracks without delay:(a) warning lights start flashing or warning bells start
ringing,
(b) a gate, boom or barrier starts to close,
(c) a train or tram approaches the
crossing.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) In this rule:pedestrian
facility means a footpath, bridge or other structure designed for
the use of pedestrians.
Note. Footpath is
defined in the Dictionary.
235A Crossing a pedestrian level crossing that has a red
pedestrian light
(1) A pedestrian level
crossing is an area where a footpath or shared path crosses a
railway or tram tracks at substantially the same level.Note. Footpath,
shared
path and tram tracks are
defined in the Dictionary.
(2) If a pedestrian approaches a pedestrian level crossing that has a
red pedestrian light, he or she must not start to cross the crossing while the
light is red.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Red pedestrian
light is defined in the Dictionary.
(3) If a red pedestrian light at a pedestrian level crossing appears
after a pedestrian has started to cross the crossing, he or she must finish
crossing the crossing without delay.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Red pedestrian
light is defined in the Dictionary.
Red pedestrian light showing red pedestrian
symbol  |
236 Pedestrians not to cause a traffic hazard or
obstruction
(1) A pedestrian must not cause a traffic hazard by moving into the
path of a driver.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) A pedestrian must not unreasonably obstruct the path of any driver
or another pedestrian.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) For subrule (2), a pedestrian does not unreasonably obstruct the
path of another pedestrian only by travelling more slowly than other
pedestrians.
(4) A pedestrian must not stand on, or move onto, a road to:(a) solicit contributions, employment or business from an occupant of
a vehicle, or
(b) hitchhike, or
(c) display an advertisement, or
(d) sell or offer articles for sale, or
(e) wash or clean, or offer to wash or clean, the windscreen of a
vehicle.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(5) A driver, or a passenger, in or on a vehicle must not buy, or
offer to buy, an article or service from a person standing on a
road.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(6) Subrules (4) and (5) do not apply to the carrying on of an
activity permitted by another law of this
jurisdiction.
(7) In this rule:road
includes any shoulder of the road, and any median strip, painted island or
traffic island, but does not include any other road related
area.
Note. Median strip,
painted
island and traffic
island are defined in the Dictionary, shoulder is
defined in rule 12, and road related
area is defined in rule 13.
237 Getting on or into a moving vehicle
(1) A person must not get on, or into, a moving vehicle unless:(a) the person is engaged in the door-to-door delivery or collection
of goods, or in the collection of waste or garbage, and is required to get in
or out of the vehicle, or on or off the vehicle, at frequent intervals,
and
(b) the vehicle is not travelling at a speed over 5 kilometres per
hour.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) This rule does not apply to a person who is getting on or off a
bicycle or animal.Note
1. Bicycle is defined
in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 269 (1) prohibits a person getting off, or out of, a moving
vehicle.
238 Pedestrians travelling along a road (except in or on a
wheeled recreational device or toy)
(1) A pedestrian must not travel along a road if there is a footpath
or nature strip adjacent to the road, unless it is impracticable to travel on
the footpath or nature strip.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Footpath and
nature
strip are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A pedestrian travelling along a road:(a) must keep as far to the left or right side of the road as is
practicable, and
(ab) must, when moving forward, face approaching traffic that is moving
in the direction opposite to which the pedestrian is travelling, unless it is
impracticable to do so, and
(b) must not travel on the road alongside more than 1 other pedestrian
or vehicle travelling on the road in the same direction as the pedestrian,
unless the pedestrian is overtaking other
pedestrians.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) In this rule:pedestrian does not
include a person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled
toy.
road
does not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note
1. Road related
area is defined in rule 13, shoulder is
defined in rule 12, and wheeled
recreational device and wheeled toy are
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Persons travelling on roads in or on wheeled recreational devices
or wheeled toys are dealt with in rule 241.
239 Pedestrians on a bicycle path or separated
footpath
(1) A pedestrian must not be on a bicycle path, or a part of a
separated footpath designated for the use of bicycles, unless the
pedestrian:(a) is crossing the bicycle path or separated footpath by the shortest
safe route, and
(b) does not stay on the bicycle path or separated footpath for longer
than necessary to cross the bicycle path or separated footpath
safely.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Bicycle is defined
in the Dictionary, and bicycle path
and separated
footpath are defined in subrule (4).
Note
2. Rule 336 deals with how parts of a separated footpath are
designated for bicycle riders and pedestrians.
(2) However, a pedestrian may be on a bicycle path, or a part of a
separated footpath designated for the use of bicycles, if:(a) the pedestrian is:(i) in or pushing a wheelchair, or
(ii) on rollerblades, rollerskates or a similar wheeled recreational
device, and
(b) there is no traffic control device, or information on or with a
traffic control device, applying to the bicycle path or separated footpath
that indicates that the pedestrian is not permitted to be on the bicycle path
or the part of the separated footpath designated for the use of
bicycles.
Note
1. Traffic control
device, wheelchair,
wheeled
recreational device and with are defined in
the Dictionary.
Note
2. Rule 243 (2) provides that a person travelling on rollerblades,
rollerskates, or a similar wheeled recreational device, on a bicycle path, or
a part of a separated footpath designated for the use of bicycles, must keep
out of the path of any bicycle.
(3) A pedestrian who is crossing a bicycle path, or a part of a
separated footpath designated for the use of bicycles, must keep out of the
path of any bicycle, or any pedestrian who is permitted under subrule (2) to
be on the bicycle path, or the part of the separated footpath designated for
the use of bicycles.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(4) In these Rules:bicycle
path means a length of path beginning at a bicycle path sign
or bicycle path road marking, and ending at the nearest of the
following:
(a) an end bicycle path sign or end bicycle path road
marking,
(b) a separated footpath sign or separated footpath road
marking,
(c) a road (except a road related area),
(d) the end of the path.
Note. Road
related area is defined in rule 13.
bicycle path road
marking means a road marking on a path, consisting of a bicycle
symbol, the words “bicycles only”, or both the bicycle symbol and
the word “only”.
Note. Bicycle
symbol is defined in the Dictionary.
end bicycle path
road marking means a bicycle path road marking with the word
“end”.
end
separated footpath road marking means a separated footpath road
marking with the word “end”.
separated
footpath means a length of footpath beginning at a separated
footpath sign or separated footpath road marking, and ending at the
nearest of the following:
(a) an end separated footpath sign or end separated footpath
road marking,
(b) a bicycle path sign or bicycle path road
marking,
(c) a no bicycles sign or no bicycles road
marking,
(d) a road (except a road related area),
(e) the end of the footpath.
Note. Footpath
and no
bicycles road marking are defined in the
Dictionary.
separated
footpath road marking means a road marking on a footpath consisting
of a pedestrian symbol and a bicycle symbol side by side, with or without the
word “only”.
Note. Pedestrian
symbol is defined in the Dictionary.
Bicycle path sign  | End bicycle path sign  |
Separated footpath sign  | End separated footpath sign  |
No bicycles sign  |
Note for
diagrams. A separated footpath sign may have the pedestrian symbol
and the bicycle symbol reversed—see rule 316 (4).
Division 2 Rules for persons travelling in or on wheeled
recreational devices and wheeled toys
Note 1. For these Rules, a person in or on a wheeled recreational device
or wheeled toy is a pedestrian, not a rider—see rule 18 (d). This
Division contains rules that apply only to persons travelling in or on wheeled
recreational devices and wheeled toys.
Note 2. Wheeled recreational
device and wheeled
toy are defined in the Dictionary.
240A No wheeled recreational devices or toys sign
A person on a road who is travelling in or on a wheeled
recreational device or wheeled toy must not travel past a no wheeled
recreational devices or toys sign.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
No wheeled recreational devices or toys
sign |

| 
|
240 Wheeled recreational devices and toys not to be used on
certain roads
(1) A person must not travel in or on a wheeled recreational device or
wheeled toy on:(a) a road with a dividing line or median strip,
or
(b) a road on which the speed limit is greater than 50 kilometres per
hour, or
(c) a one-way road with more than 1 marked
lane.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Dividing line,
marked
lane, median strip
and one-way
road are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A person must not travel in or on a wheeled recreational
device:(a) on a road that is declared, under another law of this
jurisdiction, to be a road on which wheeled recreational devices are
prohibited, or
(b) on a road at night, or
(c) on a road at any time while any person travelling in or on the
device is wholly or partly assisted in propelling the device by means other
than human power.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Night is defined in
the Dictionary.
Note
2. Subrule (2) (c) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in
rule 240 of the Australian Road
Rules. However, the corresponding paragraph in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of
this jurisdiction to prohibit a person from travelling in or on a wheeled
recreational device at other times. Different rules may apply in other
Australian jurisdictions.
(3) A person must not travel in or on a wheeled toy:(a) on a road that is declared, under another law of this
jurisdiction, to be a road on which wheeled toys are prohibited,
or
(b) on a road at a particular time if another law of this jurisdiction
prohibits wheeled toys on all roads, or that road, at that
time.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3A) Subrules (1) and (2) do not apply to a person who is crossing a
road in or on a wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy, if the
person:(a) crosses the road by the shortest safe route,
and
(b) does not stay on the road longer than necessary to cross the road
safely, and
(c) is not prohibited, under another law of this jurisdiction, from
crossing the road in or on the wheeled recreational device or wheeled
toy.
(4) In subrules (1) and (2) (b), road does not include a
road related area but includes any shoulder of the
road.
241 Travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or toy
on a road
(1) A person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or
wheeled toy on a road:(a) must keep as far to the left side of the road as is practicable,
and
(b) must not travel alongside more than 1 other pedestrian or vehicle
travelling on the road in the same direction as the person, unless the person
is overtaking other pedestrians.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) In this rule:road
does not include a road related area, but, in subrule (1) (b), includes any
shoulder of the road.
Note. Road related
area is defined in rule 13, and shoulder is
defined in rule 12.
242 Travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or toy
on a footpath or shared path
(1) A person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or
wheeled toy on a footpath or shared path must:(a) keep to the left of the footpath or shared path unless it is
impracticable to do so, and
(b) give way to any pedestrian (except a person travelling in or on a
wheeled recreational device or wheeled toy) who is on the footpath or shared
path.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Footpath is
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. For this rule, give way means the
person must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see
the definition in the Dictionary.
Note
3. Bicycle riders on footpaths and shared paths must give way to
persons travelling in or on wheeled recreational devices or toys, as well as
other pedestrians—see rule 250 (2).
Note
4. Another law of this jurisdiction may prescribe give way rules for
persons travelling in or on wheeled recreational devices or
toys.
(2) A shared
path is an area open to the public (except a separated footpath)
that is designated for, or has as one of its main uses, use by both the riders
of bicycles and pedestrians, and includes a length of path for use by both
bicycles and pedestrians beginning at a shared path sign or shared path
road marking and ending at the nearest of the following:(a) an end shared path sign or end shared path road
marking,
(b) a no bicycles sign or no bicycles road
marking,
(c) a bicycle path sign or bicycle path road
marking,
(d) a road (except a road related area),
(e) the end of the path.
Note. Bicycle and
no
bicycles road marking are defined in the Dictionary, road related
area is defined in rule 13, and bicycle path
road marking and separated
footpath are defined in rule 239.
Shared path sign  | End shared path sign  |
No bicycles sign  | Bicycle path sign  |
(3) In this rule:end shared path
road marking means a shared path road marking with the word
“end”.
shared path road
marking means a road marking consisting of a pedestrian symbol above
a bicycle symbol.
243 Travelling on rollerblades etc on a bicycle path or
separated footpath
(1) A person travelling on rollerblades, rollerskates, or a similar
wheeled recreational device, must not be on a part of a separated footpath
designated for the use of pedestrians unless the person:(a) is crossing the separated footpath by the shortest safe route,
and
(b) does not stay on the separated footpath for longer than necessary
to cross the separated footpath safely.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Separated
footpath is defined in rule 239.
(2) A person travelling on rollerblades, rollerskates, or a similar
wheeled recreational device, on a bicycle path, or a part of a separated
footpath designated for the use of bicycles, must keep out of the path of any
bicycle.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bicycle is defined
in the Dictionary, and bicycle path is
defined in rule 239.
244 Wheeled recreational devices or wheeled toys being towed
etc
(1) A person must not travel in or on a wheeled recreational device or
wheeled toy that is being towed by a vehicle.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) A person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or
wheeled toy must not hold onto a vehicle while the vehicle is
moving.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) A person travelling in or on a wheeled recreational device or
wheeled toy must not travel within 2 metres of the rear of a moving motor
vehicle continuously for more than 200 metres.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
Note. Vehicle is defined in
rule 15.
244A Australian Road Rule not reproduced
* * * * *Note. Rule 244A (Meanings of scooter and motorised scooter) of the
Australian Road Rules has not been
reproduced in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve
uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road
Rules.
244B Australian Road Rule not reproduced
* * * * *Note. Rule 244B (Wearing of helmets by users of motorised scooters) of
the Australian Road Rules has not
been reproduced in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to
preserve uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road
Rules.
244C Australian Road Rule not reproduced
* * * * *Note. Rule 244C (Motorised scooters not to be used) of the Australian Road Rules has not been
reproduced in these Rules. This rule has been left blank in order to preserve
uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road
Rules.
Part 15 Additional rules for bicycle riders
Note 1. This Part contains rules that apply only to bicycle riders. Most
rules in these Rules apply to bicycle riders in the same way as they apply to
drivers—see rule 19. There are some other rules that are for bicycle
riders only, or that have exceptions for bicycle riders. These include:• optional hook turn by bicycle riders—rule
35
• bicycle riders making a hook turn contrary to a no hook turn by
bicycles sign—rule 36
• bicycle riders excepted from giving stop signals—rule
52
• exception for bicycle riders riding in emergency stopping
lanes—rule 95
• bicycle riders entering and leaving roundabouts—rules 111
and 119
• bicycle riders overtaking on the left—rule
141
• riding alongside other riders—rule 151
• bicycle lanes—rule 153
• parking at a bicycle rail or in a bicycle rack—rule
166
• stopping on footpaths—rule 197
• stopping on a road with a bicycle parking sign—rule
201.
Note 2. Bicycle is defined
in the Dictionary.
245 Riding a bicycle
The rider of a bicycle must:(a) sit astride the rider’s seat facing forwards (except if the
bicycle is not built to be ridden astride), and
(b) ride with at least 1 hand on the handlebars,
and
(c) if the bicycle is equipped with a seat—not ride the bicycle
seated in any other position on the bicycle.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
245–1 NSW rule: riding a bicycle negligently, furiously
or recklessly
(cf RRR, cl 96A)
(1) The rider of a bicycle must not ride the bicycle:(a) negligently, or
(b) furiously, or
(c) recklessly.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) An offence against subrule (1) is not a strict liability
offence.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
246 Carrying people on a bicycle
(1) The rider of a bicycle must not carry more persons on the bicycle
than the bicycle is designed to carry.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Example. A single-seat bicycle with a child’s seat attached is
designed to carry 2 people, 1 on the bicycle seat and 1 on the attached
child’s seat.
(2) A passenger on a bicycle that is moving, or is stationary but not
parked, must sit in the seat designed for the passenger.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) The rider of a bicycle must not ride with a passenger unless the
passenger complies with subrule (2).Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
247 Riding in a bicycle lane on a road
(1) The rider of a bicycle riding on a length of road with a bicycle
lane designed for bicycles travelling in the same direction as the rider must
ride in the bicycle lane unless it is impracticable to do so.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Rule 153 defines a bicycle lane and
deals with the use of bicycle lanes by other vehicles.
(2) In this rule:road does
not include a road related area.
Note. Road
related area includes the shoulder of a road—see rule
13.
247A Entering a bicycle storage area
(1) A rider of a bicycle approaching a bicycle storage area at an
intersection that has traffic lights or traffic arrows showing a red traffic
light or red arrow must not enter the bicycle storage area other than from a
bicycle lane, unless the rider is not required to ride in the bicycle lane
under these Rules.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bicycle storage
area is defined in the Dictionary.
(2) Subrule (1) does not apply if:(a) the bicycle storage area cannot, under another law of this
jurisdiction, be entered from a bicycle lane, and
(b) the rider enters the area in accordance with another law of this
jurisdiction.
247B Giving way while entering or in a bicycle storage
area
(1) A rider of a bicycle must when entering a bicycle storage area,
give way to:(a) any vehicle that is in the area, and
(b) if the area is before any green or yellow traffic lights, any
motor vehicle that is entering or about to enter the area, unless the motor
vehicle is turning in a direction that is subject to a red traffic arrow,
and
(c) if the area forms part of a lane to which traffic arrows apply,
any motor vehicle that is entering or about to enter the area at a time when
those arrows are green or yellow.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bicycle storage
area is defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A rider of a bicycle that is in a bicycle storage area that
extends across more than one lane of a multi-lane road must, if the area is
before any green or yellow traffic lights, give way to a motor vehicle that is
in any lane other than the lane that the bicycle is directly in front of,
unless the motor vehicle is turning in a direction that is subject to a red
traffic arrow.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
248 No riding across a road on a crossing
(1) The rider of a bicycle must not ride across a road, or part of a
road, on a children’s crossing or pedestrian crossing.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Children’s
crossing is defined in rule 80, and pedestrian
crossing is defined in rule 81.
(2) The rider of a bicycle must not ride across a road, or part of a
road, on a marked foot crossing, unless there are bicycle crossing lights at
the crossing showing a green bicycle crossing light.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Marked foot
crossing is defined in the Dictionary.
249 Riding on a separated footpath
The rider of a bicycle must not ride on a part of a separated
footpath designated for the use of pedestrians.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note 1. Separated
footpath is defined in rule 239, and pedestrian is defined in
rule 18.
Note 2. Rule 336 deals with how parts of a separated footpath are
designated for bicycle riders and pedestrians.
250 Riding on a footpath or shared path
(1) The rider of a bicycle who is 12 years old or older must not ride
on a footpath unless:(a) if the rider is an adult—the rider is accompanying a child
under 12 years of age who is riding on the footpath and the child is under the
rider’s supervision, or
(b) if the rider is not an adult—the rider is under the
supervision of an accompanying adult as referred to in paragraph (a),
or
(c) the rider is a postal worker who is riding the bicycle in the
course of his or her duties as a postal worker.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Footpath and postal worker are
defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Subrule (1) is not uniform with the corresponding subrule in rule
250 of the Australian Road Rules.
However, the corresponding subrule in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of
this jurisdiction to prohibit a rider of a bicycle who is 12 years old or
older from riding on a footpath. Different rules may apply in other Australian
jurisdictions.
Note
3. A rider of a bicycle who is under 12 years of age may ride on a
footpath unless such a rider is prohibited from doing so under rule
250–1 or rule 252.
(2) The rider of a bicycle riding on a footpath or shared path
must:(a) keep to the left of the footpath or shared path unless it is
impracticable to do so, and
(b) give way to any pedestrian on the footpath or shared
path.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Pedestrian is defined
in rule 18, and shared
path is defined in rule 242.
Note
2. For subrule (2), give way means the rider
must slow down and, if necessary, stop to avoid a collision—see the
definition in the Dictionary.
(3) In this rule:adult means
an individual who is 18 years old or older.
Note. There is no corresponding definition for this term for the
purposes of rule 250 of the Australian Road
Rules. The definition is required for the purposes of subrule
(1) (a) and (b).
footpath does not include a
separated footpath.
Note. Separated
footpath is defined in rule 239.
250–1 NSW rule: children under 12 years not to ride on
certain footpaths
(cf RRR, cl 83)
(1) A rider of a bicycle who is under 12 years old must not ride on
any footpath in an area that the Minister has declared, by order published in
the Gazette, to be an area in which riding on footpaths by children under 12
years of age is prohibited.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) In this rule:footpath does not include a
separated footpath.
Note
1. Separated
footpath is defined in rule 239.
Note 2. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
251 Riding to the left of oncoming bicycle riders on a
path
The rider of a bicycle riding on a bicycle path, footpath,
separated footpath or shared path must keep to the left of any oncoming
bicycle rider on the path.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bicycle
path and separated footpath
are defined in rule 239, footpath is defined in the
Dictionary, and shared
path is defined in rule 242.
252 No bicycles signs and markings
(1) The rider of a bicycle must not ride on a length of road or
footpath to which a no bicycles sign, or a no bicycles road marking,
applies.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Footpath, length of road and
no bicycles
road marking are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A no bicycles sign, or a no bicycles road marking, applies
to a length of road or footpath beginning at the sign or marking and ending at
the nearest of the following:(a) a bicycle path sign or bicycle path road
marking,
(b) a bicycle lane sign,
(c) a separated footpath sign or separated footpath road
marking,
(d) a shared path sign,
(e) an end no bicycles sign,
(f) the next intersection.
Note. Intersection is
defined in the Dictionary, and bicycle path road
marking and separated
footpath road marking are defined in rule 239.
No bicycles sign  | Bicycle path sign  |
Bicycle lane sign  | Separated footpath sign  |
Shared path sign  | End no bicycles sign  |
Note for
diagrams. A separated footpath sign may have the pedestrian symbol
and the bicycle symbol reversed—see rule 316 (4).
253 Bicycle riders not to cause a traffic hazard
The rider of a bicycle must not cause a traffic hazard by moving
into the path of a driver or pedestrian.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
254 Bicycles being towed etc
(1) A person must not ride on a bicycle that is being towed by another
vehicle.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Vehicle is defined in
rule 15.
(2) The rider of a bicycle must not hold onto another vehicle while
the vehicle is moving.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
255 Riding too close to the rear of a motor
vehicle
The rider of a bicycle must not ride within 2 metres of the rear
of a moving motor vehicle continuously for more than 200
metres.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Motor
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
256 Bicycle helmets
(1) The rider of a bicycle must wear an approved bicycle helmet
securely fitted and fastened on the rider’s head, unless the rider is
exempt from wearing a bicycle helmet under another law of this
jurisdiction.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Approved bicycle
helmet is defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A passenger on a bicycle that is moving, or is stationary but not
parked, must wear an approved bicycle helmet securely fitted and fastened on
the passenger’s head, unless the passenger is:(a) a paying passenger on a three or four-wheeled bicycle,
or
(b) exempt from wearing a bicycle helmet under another law of this
jurisdiction.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(3) The rider of a bicycle must not ride with a passenger on the
bicycle unless the passenger complies with subrule (2).Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
257 Riding with a person on a bicycle trailer
(1) The rider of a bicycle must not tow a bicycle trailer with a
person in or on the bicycle trailer, unless:(a) the rider is 16 years old, or older, and
(b) the person in or on the bicycle trailer is under 10 years old, or
as otherwise provided under another law of this jurisdiction,
and
(c) the bicycle trailer can safely carry the person,
and
(d) the person in or on the bicycle trailer is wearing an approved
bicycle helmet securely fitted and fastened on the person’s head, unless
the person is exempt from wearing a bicycle helmet under another law of this
jurisdiction.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Approved bicycle
helmet is defined in the Dictionary.
(2) In this rule:bicycle
trailer means a vehicle that is built to be towed, or is towed, by a
bicycle.
Note. Vehicle is defined in
rule 15.
258 Equipment on a bicycle
A person must not ride a bicycle that does not have:(a) at least 1 effective brake, and
(b) a bell, horn, or similar warning device, in working
order.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
259 Riding at night
The rider of a bicycle must not ride at night, or in hazardous
weather conditions causing reduced visibility, unless the bicycle, or the
rider, displays:(a) a flashing or steady white light that is clearly visible for at
least 200 metres from the front of the bicycle, and
(b) a flashing or steady red light that is clearly visible for at
least 200 metres from the rear of the bicycle, and
(c) a red reflector that is clearly visible for at least 50 metres
from the rear of the bicycle when light is projected onto it by a
vehicle’s headlight on low-beam.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Low-beam
and night are defined in
the Dictionary.
260 Stopping for a red bicycle crossing light
(1) The rider of a bicycle approaching or at bicycle crossing lights
showing a red bicycle crossing light must stop before reaching the bicycle
crossing lights.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Bicycle crossing
lights is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Red bicycle
crossing light includes a flashing red bicycle crossing
light—see the definition in the Dictionary.
(2) The rider must not proceed until:(a) the bicycle crossing lights change to green,
or
(b) there is no red bicycle crossing light
showing.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Green bicycle
crossing light is defined in the Dictionary.
Example.
Red bicycle crossing light  | Green bicycle crossing light  |
261 Stopping for a yellow bicycle crossing light
(1) The rider of a bicycle approaching bicycle crossing lights showing
a yellow bicycle crossing light must comply with this rule.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Bicycle crossing
lights is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. Yellow bicycle
crossing light includes a flashing yellow bicycle crossing
light—see the definition in the Dictionary.
(2) If the rider can stop safely before reaching the bicycle crossing
lights, the bicycle rider must stop before reaching the
lights.
(3) If the rider stops before reaching the bicycle crossing lights,
and the lights change to red, the bicycle rider must not proceed until:(a) the bicycle crossing lights change to green,
or
(b) there is no red or yellow bicycle crossing light
showing.
Note. Green bicycle
crossing light and red bicycle
crossing light are defined in the Dictionary.
Yellow bicycle crossing light  |
262 Proceeding when bicycle crossing lights change to yellow
or red
(1) The rider of a bicycle who is crossing at an intersection, or
another place on a road, with bicycle crossing lights and traffic lights must
comply with this rule.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bicycle crossing
lights, intersection and
traffic
lights are defined in the Dictionary.
(2) If the bicycle crossing lights change from green to yellow,
flashing yellow, red or flashing red while the rider is crossing the road, the
rider must not stay on the road for longer than necessary to cross safely to
the nearer (in the direction of travel of the rider) of the following:(a) a dividing strip, safety zone, or traffic island, forming part of
the area set aside or used by riders of bicycles to cross the road at the
intersection or place (the safety
area),
(b) the far side of the road.
Note. Dividing
strip and traffic island are
defined in the Dictionary, and safety zone is defined
in rule 162.
(2A) Despite subrule (2), in the circumstances set out in that subrule
the rider may instead return to the side of the road, or to the safety area,
that he or she has just left, but only if:(a) at the time the lights change, that side or safety area is closer
to him or her than the side or safety area (whichever is the closer) that he
or she was heading for at that time, and
(b) he or she does not stay on the road for longer than is necessary
to return to that side or safety area.
(3) If, under subrule (2), the rider crosses to the safety area, the
rider must remain in the safety area until the bicycle crossing lights change
to green.
(4) However, if the rider cannot operate the bicycle crossing lights
from the safety area, the rider may cross to the far side of the road
when:(a) the traffic lights change to green or flashing yellow, or there is
no red traffic light showing, and
(b) it is safe to do so.
Note. Red
traffic light is defined in the Dictionary.
(5) In this rule:road does
not include a road related area, but includes any shoulder of the
road.
Note. Road
related area is defined in rule 13 and shoulder is defined in
rule 12.
Part 16 Rules for persons travelling in or on
vehicles
263 Application of Part to persons in or on trams
This Part, except rule 269 (1), does not apply to a person in or
on a tram.Note. Rule 269 (1) prohibits a person getting off, or out of, a moving
vehicle.
264 Wearing of seatbelts by drivers
(1) The driver of a motor vehicle that is moving, or is stationary but
not parked, must comply with this rule if the driver’s seating position
is fitted with an approved seatbelt.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Driver is defined in rule
16, and motor
vehicle and park are defined in the
Dictionary.
(2) The driver must wear the seatbelt properly adjusted and fastened
unless the driver is:(a) reversing the vehicle, or
(b) exempt from wearing a seatbelt under rule
267.
Note. Rule 267 provides exemptions from wearing
seatbelts.
(2–1) This rule does not apply to the driver of a motor vehicle (other
than a motor bike) who is the holder of a learner licence or a provisional P1
or P2 licence.Note
1. Approved
seatbelt, motor bike, motor vehicle,
provisional
P1 licence and provisional P2
licence are defined in the Dictionary, and learner licence
is defined in the Act.
Note
2. Rule 267–1 provides for the use of seatbelts and other
restraints by drivers of motor vehicles (other than motor bikes) who are
holders of learner licences or provisional P1 or P2 licences and their
passengers.
Note
3. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 264 of the Australian
Road Rules.
265 Wearing of seatbelts by passengers 16 years old or
older
(1) A passenger in or on a motor vehicle that is moving, or that is
stationary but not parked, must comply with subrule (2) if he or she:(a) is 16 years old or older, and
(b) is not exempt from wearing a seatbelt under rule
267.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(2) The passenger:(a) must occupy a seating position that is fitted with an approved
seatbelt, and
(b) must not occupy the same seating position as another passenger
(whether or not the other passenger is exempt from wearing a seatbelt under
rule 267), and
(c) must wear the seatbelt properly adjusted and
fastened.
Note. Approved
seatbelt is defined in the Dictionary.
(3) The driver of a motor vehicle (except a bus or taxi) that is
moving, or that is stationary but not parked, must ensure that each passenger
in or on the vehicle who is 16 years old or older complies with subrule (2),
unless the passenger is exempt from wearing a seatbelt under rule
267.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bus,
motor
vehicle, park and taxi are defined in the
Dictionary.
(3–1) This rule does not apply to the driver of a motor vehicle (other
than a motor bike) who is the holder of a learner licence or a provisional P1
or P2 licence or to any passenger in a motor vehicle (other than a motor bike)
driven by such a driver.Note
1. Motor
bike, motor vehicle,
provisional
P1 licence and provisional P2
licence are defined in the Dictionary, and learner licence
is defined in the Act.
Note
2. Rule 267–1 provides for the use of seatbelts and other
restraints by drivers of motor vehicles (other than motor bikes) who are
holders of learner licences or provisional P1 or P2 licences and their
passengers.
Note
3. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 265 of the Australian
Road Rules.
(3–2) The driver of a motor vehicle does not commit an offence under
subrule (3) that arises from the refusal or failure of a passenger to wear a
seatbelt properly fastened and adjusted if the passenger is in his or her
lawful custody and is being transported by the driver:(a) in the course of his or her employment as a juvenile justice
officer (within the meaning of the Children
(Detention Centres) Act 1987), or
(b) in the course of his or her employment as a correctional officer
(within the meaning of the Crimes
(Administration of Sentences) Act 1999),
or
(c) in the course of performing the duties of a correctional officer
in accordance with an authority issued under section 240 of the Crimes (Administration of Sentences) Act
1999.
Note
1. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 265 of the Australian
Road Rules.
266 Wearing of seatbelts by passengers under 16 years
old
(1) The driver of a motor vehicle (except a bus or motor bike) that is
moving, or is stationary but not parked, must ensure that this rule is
complied with for each passenger in or on the vehicle who is under 16 years
old.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bus,
motor bike,
motor
vehicle and park are defined in the
Dictionary.
(2) If the passenger is less than 6 months old, he or she must be
restrained in a suitable and properly fastened and adjusted rearward facing
approved child restraint.Note
1. Approved child
restraint is defined in subrule (7), approved
seatbelt is defined in the Dictionary and rearward facing is
defined in subrule (6A).
Note
2. See subrule (4B) if a passenger cannot safely be restrained as
required by this subrule because of his or her height or
weight.
(2A) If the passenger is 6 months old or older, but is less than 4
years old, he or she must be restrained in a suitable and properly fastened
and adjusted:(a) rearward facing approved child restraint, or
(b) forward facing approved child restraint that has an inbuilt
harness.
Note
1. Approved child
restraint is defined in subrule (7) and forward facing and
rearward
facing are defined in subrule (6A).
Note
2. See subrule (4C) if a passenger cannot safely be restrained as
required by this subrule because of his or her height or
weight.
(2B) If the passenger is 4 years old or older, but is less than 7 years
old, he or she must:(a) be restrained in a suitable and properly fastened and adjusted
forward facing approved child restraint that has an inbuilt harness,
or
(b) be placed on a properly positioned approved booster seat and be
restrained by an approved seatbelt that is properly adjusted and fastened,
or
(c) if he or she is seated in a seating position in a part of the
vehicle that is designed primarily for the carriage of goods:(i) be restrained by a suitable lap and sash style seatbelt that is
properly adjusted and fastened, or
(ii) have his or her hip restrained by a suitable lap type seatbelt
that is properly adjusted and fastened, and have his or her upper body
restrained by an approved child safety harness that is properly adjusted and
fastened.
Note
1. Approved child
restraint and approved booster
seat are defined in subrule (7) and forward facing is
defined in subrule (6A).
Note
2. See subrule (4D) if a passenger cannot safely be restrained as
required by this subrule because of his or her height or
weight.
Note
3. In relation to paragraph (b), subrule (4E) permits an approved
child safety harness to be worn instead of the sash part of a lap and sash
seatbelt.
Note
4. In relation to paragraph (c), under rule 268 (2), a person may
only occupy a seating position in a part of a vehicle that is designed
primarily for the carriage of goods if that part of the vehicle is enclosed
and that position is suitable for the size and weight of the
person.
Note
5. Subrule (2B) (c) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph
in rule 266 of the Australian Road
Rules. Different rules may apply in other Australian
jurisdictions.
(3) A passenger who is under 4 years old must not be in the front row
of a motor vehicle that has 2 or more rows of
seats.
(3A) A passenger who is 4 years old or older, but is less than 7 years
old, must not be in the front row of a motor vehicle that has 2 or more rows
of seats unless there is no available seating position in the row or rows
behind the front row in which the passenger can sit in accordance with this
rule.
(3A–1) For the purposes of subrule (3A), an available seating
position includes a seating position that is occupied by another
passenger who would, under this Part, be able to occupy a different seating
position, but does not include a seating position in a part of the vehicle
that is designed primarily for the carriage of goods.Example. Subrule (3A) would permit a 6 year old to sit in the front row of
a vehicle that has 2 rows of seats if 2 occupied approved child restraints in
the back row encroached on an empty seating position between them in a way
that made it impossible for another approved child restraint or booster seat
to be placed in that position.
Note. Subrule (3A) is not uniform with the corresponding subrule in rule
266 of the Australian Road Rules.
Subrule (3A–1) is an additional NSW subrule. There is no corresponding
subrule in rule 266 of the Australian Road
Rules.
(4) If the passenger is at least 7 years old but under 16 years
old:(a) he or she must be placed on a properly positioned approved booster
seat and be restrained by a seatbelt that is properly adjusted and fastened,
or
(b) he or she:(i) must occupy a seating position that is fitted with a suitable
approved seatbelt, and
(ii) must not occupy the same seating position as another passenger
(whether or not the other passenger is exempt from wearing a seatbelt under
rule 267), and
(iii) must wear the seatbelt properly adjusted and
fastened.
Note
1. In relation to paragraph (b) (iii), subrule (4E) permits an
approved child safety harness to be worn instead of the sash part of a lap and
sash seatbelt.
Note
2. Subrule (4) (a) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in
rule 266 of the Australian Road
Rules.
(4A) Subrules (2), (2A), (2B) and (4) do not apply if the passenger is
exempt from wearing a seatbelt under rule 267.
(4A–1) Subrules (3) and (3A) do not apply if the passenger is, under rule
267–2, exempt from the front seat position restrictions set out in those
subrules.Note. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 266 of the Australian
Road Rules.
(4B) If a passenger cannot safely be restrained as required by subrule
(2) because of his or her height or weight, he or she must be restrained as if
subrule (2A) applied to him or her.
(4C) If a passenger cannot safely be restrained as required by subrule
(2A) or (4B) because of his or her height or weight, he or she must be
restrained as if subrule (2B) applied to him or
her.
(4D) If a passenger cannot safely be restrained as required by subrule
(2B) or (4C) because of his or her height or weight, he or she must be
restrained as if subrule (4) applied to him or her.
(4E) In the case of a passenger sitting in a seating position that is
fitted with a lap and sash type seatbelt, it is sufficient compliance with
subrule (2B) (b) or (4) (b) (iii), as the case may be, if, instead of using
the sash part of the seatbelt, an approved child safety harness that is
properly adjusted and fastened is used to restrain the upper body of the
passenger.Note. Approved child
safety harness is defined in subrule (7).
(5) * * * * *Note. Rule 266 (5) of the Australian Road
Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules. The subrule has
been left blank in order to preserve uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road
Rules.
(5–1) The provisions of this rule have effect in relation to passengers
in or on taxis or small buses who are under 16 years old, subject to the
following modifications:(a) subrule (2A) applies only in relation to passengers who are 6
months old or older, but less than 12 months old,
(b) subrule (2B) does not apply to any passengers who are 4 years old
or older, but less than 7 years old,
(c) subrule (4) extends to passengers who are 12 months old or older,
but less than 7 years old, in addition to passengers who are 7 years old or
older, but under 16 years old.
Note
1. Taxi
is defined in the Dictionary and small bus is defined in
subrule (7).
Note
2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 266 of the Australian
Road Rules.
(5A) * * * * *Note. Rule 266 (5A) of the Australian Road
Rules has not been reproduced in these Rules. The subrule has
been left blank in order to preserve uniformity of numbering with the Australian Road
Rules.
(5A–1) Subrules (2A) and (2B) do not apply to passengers in a motor
vehicle who are 12 months old or older, but less than 7 years old if:(a) the motor vehicle:(i) was manufactured before January 1971, and
(ii) is used on a road solely in the course of, or as an incident to,
an activity of an organisation that is identified in the records of the
Authority as an historic vehicle club, and
(iii) is registered conditionally under clause 13 of the Road Transport (Vehicle
Registration) Regulation 2007, and
(iv) is the subject of a written advice given by a relevant licensed
certifier to the effect that it is not reasonably practicable for any of the
restraints referred to in either of subrule (2A) or (2B) to be installed in
the vehicle, and that written advice is carried in the vehicle while the
passenger is in the vehicle, and
(b) the passengers are not seated in the front row of the
vehicle.
Note. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 266 of the Australian
Road Rules.
(6) For this rule:(a) an approved child restraint is available in the motor vehicle for
a passenger if an approved child restraint is fitted in the vehicle and is not
occupied by someone else under 16 years old, and
(b) an approved child restraint or approved seatbelt is suitable for a
passenger if it is suitable for restraining, or to be worn by the
passenger.
(6A) For this rule, a child restraint that is properly fastened and
adjusted:(a) is forward facing if, once it restrains a passenger, his or her
head is closer to the rear of the vehicle than his or her feet,
and
(b) is rearward facing if, once it restrains a passenger, his or her
feet are closer to the rear of the vehicle than his or her
head.
(6–1) This rule does not apply to the driver of a motor vehicle (other
than a motor bike) who is the holder of a learner licence or a provisional P1
or P2 licence.Note
1. Motor
bike, motor vehicle,
provisional
P1 licence and provisional P2
licence are defined in the Dictionary, and learner licence
is defined in the Act.
Note
2. Rule 267–1 provides for the use of seatbelts and other
restraints by drivers of motor vehicles (other than motor bikes) who are
holders of learner licences or provisional P1 or P2 licences and their
passengers.
Note
3. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 266 of the Australian
Road Rules.
(6–2) The driver of a motor vehicle does not commit an offence under
this rule that arises from the refusal or failure of a passenger to wear a
seatbelt properly fastened and adjusted if the passenger is in his or her
lawful custody and is being transported by the driver in the course of his or
her employment as a juvenile justice officer (within the meaning of the
Children (Detention Centres) Act
1987).Note
1. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 266 of the Australian
Road Rules.
(7) In this rule:approved booster
seat means any of the following:
(a) a booster seat or booster cushion that:(i) is or was designated as a Type E child restraint under the
relevant Australian Standard, and
(ii) complies with the edition of the relevant Australian Standard that
was in force at the time of its manufacture in Australia or importation into
Australia (as the case may be) or with any later edition of the Standard in
force at the time the seat or cushion is being used, and
(iii) has an identifying mark from a body accredited or approved by the
Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand that certifies
compliance with the edition concerned of the
Standard,
(b) a booster seat or cushion that:(i) is an integrated part of a motor vehicle, and
(ii) was installed by the manufacturer of the motor vehicle to enable
an existing adult lap-sash seatbelt to become suitable for use by a child,
and
(iii) complies with the relevant Australian Design Rules under the
Motor Vehicle Standards Act 1989 of
the Commonwealth for child restraints of the type concerned that was in force
at the time the vehicle was manufactured or imported into Australia (as the
case may be) or with any later edition of those Rules in force at the time the
seat or cushion is being used.
Note. This definition is not uniform with the definition in rule 266 (7)
of the Australian Road Rules.
However, the definition in the Australian Road
Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to make
provision for the approval of booster seats. Different definitions may apply
in other Australian jurisdictions.
approved child
restraint means a child restraint that:
(a) is or was designated as a Type A1, A2, A3, B or D child restraint
under the relevant Australian Standard, and
(b) complies with the edition of the relevant Australian Standard that
was in force at the time of its manufacture in Australia or importation into
Australia (as the case may be) or with any later edition of the Standard in
force at the time the restraint is being used, and
(c) has an identifying mark from a body accredited or approved by the
Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand that certifies
compliance with the edition concerned of the
Standard.
Note. This definition is not uniform with the definition in rule 266 (7)
of the Australian Road Rules.
However, the definition in the Australian Road
Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to make
provision for the approval of child restraints. Different definitions may
apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
approved child safety
harness means a harness that:
(a) is or was designated as a Type C child restraint under the
relevant Australian Standard, and
(b) complies with the edition of the relevant Australian Standard that
was in force at the time of its manufacture in Australia or importation into
Australia (as the case may be) or with any later edition of the Standard in
force at the time the harness is being used, and
(c) has an identifying mark from a body accredited or approved by the
Joint Accreditation System of Australia and New Zealand that certifies
compliance with the edition concerned of the
Standard.
Note. This definition is not uniform with the definition in rule 266 (7)
of the Australian Road Rules.
However, the definition in the Australian Road
Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to make
provision for the approval of child safety harnesses. Different definitions
may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
relevant Australian
Standard means any of the following editions of the Australian/New
Zealand Standard for child restraint systems for use in motor vehicles (as in
force from time to time):
(a) AS/NZS
1754:1995,
(b) AS/NZS
1754:2000,
(c) AS/NZS
1754:2004,
(d) any subsequent edition of the Standard.
Note. This is an additional NSW definition. There is no corresponding
definition in rule 266 of the Australian Road
Rules.
relevant licensed
certifier means a person who is registered as a licensed certifier
under the Vehicle Safety Compliance Certification Scheme of the
Authority.
Note. This is an additional NSW definition. There is no corresponding
definition in rule 266 of the Australian Road
Rules.
small
bus means a motor vehicle built mainly to carry people that seats
between 9 and 12 (inclusive) adults (including the driver) and that is used to
provide a public passenger service.
Note 1. Public
passenger service is defined in the
Dictionary.
Note 2. This is an additional NSW definition. There is no corresponding
definition in rule 266 of the Australian Road
Rules.
267 Exemptions from wearing seatbelts
(1) A person is exempt from wearing a seatbelt if:(a) the person is authorised by the Authority under rule 268–1
not to comply with rule 268 and is complying with the conditions (if any) of
the authorisation, and
(b) the person is a passenger in or on a motor vehicle with 2 or more
rows of seats and there is not another law of this jurisdiction permitting the
person to sit in the front row of seats, and the person is not in the front
row of seats.
Note
1. Motor
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary, and Authority is defined in
the Act.
Note
2. Subrule (1) (a) is not uniform with the corresponding paragraph in
rule 267 of the Australian Road
Rules. However, the corresponding paragraph in the Australian Road Rules allows another law of
this jurisdiction to exempt a person from wearing a seatbelt. Different rules
may apply in other Australian jurisdictions.
(1A) A person in or on a motor vehicle is exempt from wearing a
seatbelt if:(a) the seating position that he or she occupies is not fitted with a
seatbelt, and
(b) there is no requirement for that seating position to be fitted
with a seatbelt, and
(c) all passengers in the vehicle who are exempt from wearing a
seatbelt are complying with subrule (8).
(1B) Subrule (1A) does not apply to a person who is under 7 years
old.
(1C) To avoid doubt, subrule (1A) does not authorise a passenger to
whom subrule 266 (3) or (3A) applies to occupy a seat in the front row of
seats in a vehicle that has 2 or more rows of
seats.
(2) A person in or on a motor vehicle is exempt from wearing a
seatbelt if:(a) the person is engaged in the door-to-door delivery or collection
of goods, or in the collection of waste or garbage, and is required to get in
or out of the vehicle, or on or off the vehicle, at frequent intervals,
and
(b) the vehicle is not travelling over 25 kilometres per
hour.
(3) A person is exempt from wearing a seatbelt if:(a) the person (or, for a passenger, the driver of the vehicle in or
on which the person is a passenger) is carrying a certificate (other than a
certificate issued under subrule (3A)), issued under another law of this
jurisdiction, stating that the person is not required to wear a seatbelt,
and
(b) the person is complying with the conditions (if any) stated in the
certificate.
(3A) A person is exempt from wearing a seatbelt if:(a) he or she (or, if he or she is a passenger in or on a vehicle, the
vehicle’s driver) is carrying a certificate:(i) that is signed by a medical practitioner, and
(ii) that states that, in the opinion of the medical practitioner, the
person should not wear a seatbelt due to the person’s medical condition,
and
(iii) that displays a date of issue, and
(iv) subject to subrule (3A–1)—that displays an expiry date
that is a date not more than 12 months after the date of issue,
and
(v) that has not expired, and
(b) he or she is complying with any conditions stated in the
certificate, and
(c) there is no other law of this jurisdiction that states that this
subrule does not apply in this jurisdiction.
Note
1. Medical
practitioner is defined in subrule (9).
Note
2. Subrule (3A) (a) (iv) is not uniform with the corresponding
subparagraph in rule 267 of the Australian Road
Rules. Different rules may apply in other Australian
jurisdictions.
Note
3. Rule 353–2 (4) provides that certificates issued before the
commencement of these Rules continue in effect for the purposes of this
subrule for the period of 6 months after that
commencement.
(3A–1) Subrule (3A) (a) (iv) does not apply to any certificate that
belongs to a class of certificates that is exempted, by an order of the
Authority, from the requirement to display an expiry date.Note. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 267 of the Australian
Road Rules.
(4) However, a person is not exempt under subrule (3) or (3A) if the
person (or, for a passenger, the driver of the vehicle in or on which the
person is a passenger) does not immediately produce the certificate mentioned
in the subrule for inspection when a police officer or authorised person asks
the person (or the driver) whether the person is exempt from wearing a
seatbelt.Note. Authorised
person and police officer are
defined in the Dictionary.
(4–1) A person who is under 7 years old is exempt from being restrained
in an approved child restraint or placed on an approved booster seat
if:(a) the vehicle’s driver is carrying a certificate:(i) that is signed by a medical practitioner, and
(ii) that states that, in the opinion of the medical practitioner, the
person should not be restrained in the appropriate approved child restraint or
placed on an approved booster seat for the person due to the person’s
medical condition or disability, and
(b) the person is being properly restrained in a child restraint that
has been designed for, and is suitable for use by, that person or persons with
the same medical condition or disability.
Note
1. Approved booster
seat and approved child
restraint are defined in rule 266. Medical
practitioner is defined in subrule (9).
Note
2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 267 of the Australian
Road Rules.
(5) A person is exempt from wearing a seatbelt if:(a) the person is a passenger in or on a police or emergency vehicle,
and
(b) either:(i) if the vehicle has 2 or more rows of seats—the person is not
in the front row of seats or there is not a seating position available for the
person in another row of seats, or
(ii) if the vehicle is a police vehicle and has a caged, or other
secured, area designed for the carriage of passengers—the person
occupies a seating position in that area.
Note. Emergency
vehicle and police vehicle are
defined in the Dictionary.
(6) A person is exempt from wearing a seatbelt if he or she is
providing or receiving medical treatment of an urgent and necessary nature
while in or on a vehicle.
(6–1) A person who is a passenger in a public bus is exempt from wearing
a seatbelt (and from any requirement to use a seating position that is fitted
with a seatbelt) if:(a) the bus is being used to provide a public passenger service
(within the meaning of the Passenger
Transport Act 1990), and
(b) the bus is specifically designed for use by standing passengers,
and
(c) in the case where the bus has one or more seating positions that
are fitted with seatbelts—all of those seating positions are occupied by
other passengers.
Example for
subrule (6–1). A passenger may stand in a public bus that is fitted with
seatbelts, but only if all of the seats with seatbelts are occupied by other
passengers.
Note
1. Public
bus is defined in the Dictionary.
Note
2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 267 of the Australian
Road Rules.
(7) If a truck or bus has a sleeper compartment, a two-up driver of
the truck or bus is exempt from wearing a seatbelt while he or she occupies
the sleeper compartment for rest purposes.Note. Bus and
truck are defined
in the Dictionary.
(8) If a vehicle does not have seatbelts or approved child restraints
fitted to all its passenger seating positions, a passenger who is exempt from
wearing a seatbelt under this rule must not occupy a seating position that is
fitted with a seatbelt or an approved child restraint if the result would be
that a passenger who is not exempt from wearing a seatbelt under this rule
would be required to occupy a seating position that is not fitted with a
seatbelt or an approved child restraint.
(8–1) A reference in subrule (8) to an approved child restraint includes
a reference to an approved booster seat.Note
1. Approved booster
seat and approved child
restraint are defined in rule 266.
Note
2. This subrule is an additional NSW subrule. There is no
corresponding subrule in rule 267 of the Australian
Road Rules.
(9) In this rule:medical
practitioner means a person registered or licensed as a medical
practitioner under a law of a State or Territory that provides for the
registration or licensing of such persons.
Note. This definition is not uniform with the definition in rule 267 of
the Australian Road Rules. However,
the definition in the Australian Road
Rules allows another law of this jurisdiction to define the
term. Different definitions may apply in other Australian
jurisdictions.
two-up
driver means a person accompanying a driver of a truck or bus on a
journey, or part of a journey, who has been, is or will be sharing the task of
driving the truck or bus during the journey.
267–1 NSW rule: restraint of drivers who are holders of
learner licences or provisional P1 or P2 licences and their
passengers
(cf RRR, cl 47C)
(1) This rule applies to the driver of a motor vehicle (other than a
motor bike) who is the holder of a learner licence or a provisional P1 or P2
licence.Note. Motor
bike, motor vehicle,
provisional
P1 licence and provisional P2
licence are defined in the Dictionary, and learner licence
is defined in the Act.
(2) The driver must not drive the driver’s vehicle
unless:(a) the driver and each passenger who is 16 years old or older
occupies a seating position fitted with a suitable seatbelt and is wearing the
seatbelt properly fastened and adjusted, and
(b) the driver ensures that each passenger who is under 16 years old
is restrained in the appropriate child restraint for a person of the
passenger’s age.
(c) (Repealed)
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. See subrule (2A) for the appropriate child restraint for a
passenger who is under 16 years old.
(2A) For the purposes of subrule (2) (b), a passenger who is under 16
years old is restrained in the appropriate child
restraint for a person of the passenger’s age if the passenger
is restrained in an approved child restraint, or is using a seat belt,
approved booster seat or approved child safety harness, in a manner (including
positioning) that is required or permitted under rule 266 for a person of the
passenger’s age.Note
1. Approved booster
seat, approved child
safety harness and approved child
restraint are defined in rule 266.
Note
2. The exemptions in rule 267 (except for those in rule 267 (3A) and
(4–1) do not apply in relation to the use of appropriate child
restraints. See subrules (4) (a) and (5).
Note
3. Rule 266 does not directly apply to drivers to whom this rule
applies. See rule 266 (6–1).
(3) A person who is 16 years old or older must not travel in or on a
motor vehicle (other than a motor bike) driven by a driver to whom this rule
applies unless the person is occupying a seating position to which a suitable
seat belt is fitted and the person is using the seat belt properly fastened
and adjusted.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(4) Subrules (2) and (3) do not apply to a driver or passenger
if:(a) the driver or passenger is exempt from wearing a seat belt, or
from being restrained in an approved child restraint or placed on an approved
booster seat, under rule 267 (3A) or (4–1), or
(b) the driver or passenger belongs to a class of persons exempted
from the application of the subrule by an order of the
Authority.
Note. Approved booster
seat and approved child
restraint are defined in rule 266. Authority is defined
in the Act.
(4A) If a person who is a passenger in a vehicle is exempt under rule
267–2 from the front seat position restrictions set out in rule 266 (3)
or (3A), the driver of the vehicle is not required under this rule to ensure
that the passenger is restrained in accordance with those front seat
restrictions.
(5) Except as provided by subrule (4) (a), the exemptions in rule 267
do not apply in relation to the use of seat belts or appropriate child
restraints as required by subrule (2) or (3).
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
267–2 NSW rule: exemption from front seat position
restrictions
(1) A person who is a passenger in a vehicle is exempt from the front
seat position restrictions set out in rule 266 (3) and (3A) if:(a) the vehicle’s driver is carrying a certificate:(i) that is signed by a medical practitioner, and
(ii) that states that, in the opinion of the medical practitioner, the
person should be in the front row of a motor vehicle while a passenger due to
the person’s medical condition, and
(iii) that displays a date of issue, and
(iv) subject to subrule (2)—that displays an expiry date that is
a date not more than 12 months after the date of issue,
and
(v) that has not expired, and
(b) he or she is complying with any conditions stated in the
certificate, and
(c) there is no other law of this jurisdiction that states that this
subrule does not apply in this jurisdiction.
Note. Medical
practitioner is defined in subrule (4).
(2) Subrule (1) (a) (iv) does not apply to any certificate that
belongs to a class of certificates that is exempted, by an order of the
Authority, from the requirement to display an expiry
date.
(3) A person is not exempt under subrule (1) if the driver of the
vehicle does not immediately produce the certificate mentioned in the subrule
for inspection when a police officer or authorised person asks the driver
whether the person is exempt from rule 266 (3) or (3A).Note. Authorised
person and police officer are
defined in the Dictionary.
(4) In this rule:medical
practitioner means a person registered or licensed as a medical
practitioner under a law of a State or Territory that provides for the
registration or licensing of such persons.
Note. This rule is an additional NSW road rule. There is no
corresponding rule in the Australian Road
Rules.
268 How persons must travel in or on a motor
vehicle
(1) A person must not travel in or on a part of a motor vehicle that
is not a part designed primarily for the carriage of passengers or
goods.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Motor
vehicle is defined in the Dictionary.
(2) A person must not travel in or on a part of a motor vehicle that
is a part designed primarily for the carriage of goods unless:(a) the part is enclosed, and
(b) he or she occupies a seating position that is suitable for the
size and weight of the person and that is fitted with a
seatbelt.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note
1. Enclosed is defined in
subrule (7).
Note
2. Rule 265 deals with the wearing of seatbelts by passengers 16
years old or older, and rule 266 deals with the wearing of seatbelts by
passengers under 16 years old.
(3) A person must not travel in or on a motor vehicle with any part of
the person’s body outside a window or door of the vehicle, unless the
person is the driver of the vehicle and is giving a hand signal:(a) for changing direction to the right in accordance with rule 50,
or
(b) for stopping or slowing in accordance with rule
55.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Window is defined in the
Dictionary.
(4) The driver of a motor vehicle (except a bus) must not drive with a
passenger if any part of the passenger’s body is outside a window or
door of the vehicle.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Bus is
defined in the Dictionary.
(4A) The driver of a motor vehicle must not drive with a passenger in
or on a part of the vehicle that is not a part designed primarily for the
carriage of passengers or goods.Maximum penalty: 20 penalty
units.
(4B) The driver of a motor vehicle must not drive with a passenger in
or on a part of the vehicle that is a part designed primarily for the carriage
of goods unless:(a) the part is enclosed, and
(b) the person occupies a seating position that is suitable for the
size and weight of the person and that is fitted with a
seatbelt.
Maximum penalty: 20 penalty units.
Note. Rule 265 deals with the wearing of seatbelts by passengers 16
years old or older, and rule 266 deals with the wearing of seatbelts by
passengers under 16 years old.
(5) This rule does not apply to a person who is:(a) in or on a police or emergency vehicle, or
(b) on a motor bike, or
(c) engaged in the door-to-door delivery or collection of goods, or in
the collection of waste or garbage, in or on a motor vehicle that is not
travelling over 25 kilometres per hour.
Note. Emergency
vehicle, motor
bike, and police vehicle are
defined in the Dictionary.
(6) This rule also does not apply to a person if:(a) in all the circumstances, there is no reasonable danger of the
person falling or being thrown from the vehicle or being injured because of
the person travelling in a manner prohibited by that rule,
or